23-12-2008
13:04
Pagina 1
COLT - ENGLISH - OZME09E2
COLT - ENGLISH - OZME09E2
OWNER’S MANUAL
COLT
eng_Cover_Colt.qxp
Table of contents
Overview
General information
Locking and unlocking
1
Seat and seat belts
2
Instruments and controls
3
Starting and driving
4
For pleasant driving
5
For emergencies
6
Vehicle care
7
Maintenance
8
Specifications
9
Overview
Instruments and Controls
E00100104085
Except for Clear Tec (LHD)
Instruments P. 3-2
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch P. 3-31
Turn-signal lever P. 3-37
Headlamp levelling switch P. 3-35
Windscreen wiper and washer
switch P. 3-41
Rear window wiper and washer
switch P. 3-47
Steering wheel audio remote
control switch* P. 5-49
Front fog lamp switch* P. 3-39
Cruise control switch*
P. 4-50
Electric remote-controlled
outside rear-view mirrors
switch* P. 4-12
Ignition switch P. 4-14
Rear fog lamp switch P. 3-40
Fuses P. 8-30
Bonnet release lever P. 8-4
Steering wheel height
adjustment P. 4-9
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag (for driver’s seat) P. 2-36
Horn switch P. 3-49
Overview
Clear Tec (LHD)
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch P. 3-31
Turn-signal lever P. 3-37
Headlamp levelling switch P. 3-35
Instruments P. 3-2
Windscreen wiper and washer
switch P. 3-41
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
Steering wheel audio remote
control switch* P. 5-49
Front fog lamp switch* P. 3-39
Cruise control switch*
P. 4-50
Electric remote-controlled
outside rear-view mirrors
switch* P. 4-12
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
OFF switch* P. 4-24
Ignition switch P. 4-14
Fuses P. 8-30
Bonnet release lever P. 8-4
Rear fog lamp switch P. 3-40
Steering wheel height
adjustment P. 4-9
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag (for driver’s seat) P. 2-36
Horn switch P. 3-49
Overview
Except for Clear Tec (RHD)
Instruments P. 3-2
Windscreen wiper and washer
switch P. 3-41
Rear window wiper and washer
switch P. 3-47
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch P. 3-31
Turn-signal lever P. 3-37
Headlamp levelling switch P. 3-35
Cruise control switch* P. 4-50
Steering wheel audio
remote control switch* P. 5-49
Front fog lamp switch* P. 3-39
Electric remote-controlled
outside rear-view mirrors
switch* P. 4-12
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
P. 2-36
Horn switch P. 3-49
Steering wheel height adjustment P. 4-9
Rear fog lamp switch P. 3-40
Ignition switch P. 4-14
Bonnet release lever P. 8-4
Overview
Clear Tec (RHD)
Instruments P. 3-2
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch P. 3-31
Turn-signal lever P. 3-37
Headlamp levelling switch P. 3-35
Windscreen wiper and washer switch
P. 3-41
Rear window wiper and washer
switch P. 3-47
Cruise control switch* P. 4-50
Front fog lamp switch*
P. 3-39
Steering wheel audio
remote control switch* P. 5-49
Electric remote-controlled
outside rear-view mirrors
switch* P. 4-12
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat)
P. 2-36
Horn switch P. 3-49
Bonnet release
lever P. 8-4
Ignition switch P. 4-14
Steering wheel height adjustment P. 4-9
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
OFF switch* P. 4-24
Rear fog lamp switch P. 3-40
Overview
LHD
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 3-38
Audio* P. 5-23
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS) - airbag
(for front passenger’s
seat) P. 2-36
Heater* P. 5-7
Automatic air
conditioning* P. 5-13
Ventilators P. 5-2
Front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch P. 2-42
Accessory socket
P. 5-62
Fuel tank filler door
release lever P. 3
Heated seats switch* P. 2-7
Cup holder
(for front seats)
P. 5-73
Cup holder
(for rear seats)
P. 5-73
Rear window demister
switch P. 3-48
Gearshift lever*
P. 4-25
Allshift lever*
P. 4-28
Parking brake lever P. 4-6
Heated seats switch*
P. 2-7
Overview
RHD
Supplemental restraint
system (SRS) - airbag
(for front passenger’s seat)
P. 2-36
Audio* P. 5-23
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 3-38
Heater* P. 5-7
Automatic air
conditioning* P. 5-13
Ventilators P. 5-2
Fuses P. 8-30
Front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch P. 2-42
Cup holder
(for front seats)
P. 5-73
Rear window demister
switch P. 3-48
Accessory socket
P. 5-62
Fuel tank filler door
release lever P. 3
Gearshift lever* P. 4-25
Allshift lever* P. 4-28
Heated seats switch*
P. 2-7
Parking brake lever
P. 4-6
Cup holder (for rear seats)
P. 5-73
Heated seats switch*
P. 2-7
Overview
Interior
E00100203005
LHD (3-door models)
Lock switch P. 1-21
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - Curtain airbag* P. 2-51
Vanity mirror P. 5-61
Sun visors
P. 5-61
Room lamp/Map lamps
P. 5-63
Inside rear-view
mirror P. 4-10
Seat belts
P. 2-15
Electric window control
switch P. 1-19
Adjustable seat belt anchor
(for front seats) P. 2-19
Glove box P. 5-67
Front seat P. 2-5
Rear shelf panel* P. 5-74
Head restraints P. 2-8
Rear seat
P. 2-12
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
- Side airbag (for front seats)* P. 2-50
Overview
RHD (3-door models)
Vanity mirror
P. 5-61
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - Curtain airbag* P. 2-51
Lock switch P. 1-21
Sun visors
P. 5-61
Room lamp/Map lamps
P. 5-63
Seat belts
P. 2-15
Inside rear-view
mirror P. 4-10
Electric window control
switch P. 1-19
Adjustable seat
belt anchor
(for front seats)
P. 2-19
Glove box P. 5-67
Front seat P. 2-5
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
- Side airbag (for front seats)* P. 2-50
Rear shelf panel*
P. 5-74
Rear seat P. 2-12
Head restraints P. 2-8
Overview
LHD (5-door models)
Lock switch P. 1-21
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - Curtain airbag* Vanity mirror
P. 2-51
P. 5-61
Sun visors
P. 5-61
Electric window control
switch P. 1-19
Room lamp/Map lamps
P. 5-63
Seat belts
P. 2-15
Inside rear-view
mirror P. 4-10
Adjustable seat
belt anchor
(for front seats)
P. 2-19
Glove box P. 5-67
Rear shelf panel*
P. 5-74
Luggage floor lid*
P. 5-69
Front seat P. 2-5
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) Side airbag (for front seats)* P. 2-50
Head restraints P. 2-8
Rear seat
P. 2-12
Overview
RHD (5-door models)
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - Curtain airbag* P. 2-51
Vanity mirror
P. 5-61
Sun visors
P. 5-61
Room lamp/Map lamps
P. 5-63
Lock switch P. 1-21
Seat belts
P. 2-15
Electric window control
switch P. 1-19
Inside rear-view
mirror P. 4-10
Adjustable seat
belt anchor
(for front seats)
P. 2-19
Glove box P. 5-67
Rear shelf panel*
P. 5-74
Front seat P. 2-5
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) Side airbag (for front seats)* P. 2-50
Rear seat
P. 2-12
Head restraints P. 2-8
Luggage floor lid*
P. 5-69
Overview
Luggage area (Except for vehicle with compact spare wheel)
E00100401263
3-door models
Luggage compartment lamp P. 5-64
Tyre repair kit P. 6-10
Towing hook P. 6-10
Overview
5-door models
Luggage compartment lamp P. 5-64
Tyre repair kit P. 6-10
Towing hook
P. 6-10
Overview
Luggage area (Vehicle with compact spare wheel)
E00100401276
3-door models
Luggage compartment lamp P. 5-64
Towing hook P. 6-10
Spare wheel P. 6-24
Jack
P. 6-20
Wheel nut wrench P. 6-10
Overview
5-door models
Luggage compartment lamp P. 5-64
Towing hook P. 6-10
Wheel nut wrench
P. 6-10
Spare wheel
P. 6-24
Jack P. 6-20
Overview
Exterior
E00100503633
3-door models
Electric window control
P. 1-19
Outside rear-view mirrors
P. 4-10
Windscreen wipers P. 3-41
Fuel tank filler P. 3
Bonnet P. 8-4
Locking and unlocking
P. 1-9
Keyless entry system
P. 1-5
Side turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-47
Position lamps
P. 3-31, 8-41, 8-46
Front turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-46
Front fog lamps*
P. 3-39, 8-41, 8-48
Headlamps, low/high beam
P. 3-31, 3-33, 8-41, 8-43
Overview
3-door models
High-mounted stop lamps
P. 8-41, 8-57
Antenna P. 5-56
Stop and tail lamps P. 8-41, 8-51
Rear window wiper and
washer P. 3-47
Rear fog lamp
(LHD vehicles)
P. 3-40, 8-41, 8-56
Reversing lamp
(RHD vehicles)
P. 8-41, 8-56
Rear turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-51
Tailgate P. 1-16
Licence plate lamp P. 8-41, 8-60
Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles)
P. 8-41, 8-56
Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles)
P. 3-40, 8-41, 8-56
Tyre inflation pressures P. 8-18
Changing tyres P. 6-27
Tyre rotation P. 8-20
Tyre chains P. 8-21
Wheel covers* P. 6-33
Overview
5-door models
Electric window control
P. 1-19
Outside rear-view
mirrors P. 4-10
Windscreen wipers P. 3-41
Fuel tank filler P. 3
Bonnet P. 8-4
Locking and unlocking
P. 1-9
Keyless entry system
P. 1-5
Side turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-47
Position lamps
P. 3-31, 8-41, 8-46
Front turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-46
Front fog lamps*
P. 3-39, 8-41, 8-48
Headlamps, low/high beam
P. 3-31, 3-33, 8-41, 8-43
Overview
5-door models
High-mounted stop lamps
P. 8-41, 8-57
Antenna P. 5-56
Rear window wiper and
washer P. 3-47
Rear fog lamp
(LHD vehicles)
P. 3-40, 8-41, 8-51
Reversing lamp
(RHD vehicles)
P. 8-41, 8-51
Tailgate P. 1-16
Licence plate lamp P. 8-41, 8-60
Stop lamps P. 8-41, 8-51
Rear turn-signal lamps
P. 3-37, 8-41, 8-51
Tail lamps P. 8-51
Reversing lamp (LHD vehicles)
P. 8-41, 8-51
Rear fog lamp (RHD vehicles)
P. 3-40, 8-41, 8-51
Tyre inflation pressures P. 8-18
Changing tyres P. 6-27
Tyre rotation P. 8-20
Tyre chains P. 8-21
Wheel covers* P. 6-33
General information
Fuel selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modification/alterations to the electrical or
fuel systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Genuine parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oils safety instructions and
disposal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal information for used batteries . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
6
7
8
8
9
General information
Fuel selection
NOTE
E00200101942
Recommended fuel
!
Except for Clear Tec FFV
Unleaded petrol octane number (EN 228)
95 RON or higher
Clear Tec FFV
Unleaded petrol octane number (EN 228)
95 RON or higher, or Bio ethanol E 85
WARNING
● For Clear Tec FFV models, do not modify the fuel
system or any of its components. Flexible fuel vehicles have fuel system components that were designed
specifically for use with Bio ethanol. When replacing
any of the fuel system components, be sure to
replace them with components designed for use with
Bio ethanol. Otherwise, engine damage, a vehicle
fire, or personal injury could result.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, do not use methanol
instead of Bio ethanol E 85. Otherwise, engine damage, a vehicle fire, or personal injury could result.
!
CAUTION
● The use of leaded fuel can result in serious damage
to the engine and catalytic converter. Do not use the
leaded fuel.
2
● Your vehicle has the knock control system so that you can
use unleaded petrol 90 RON as an emergent measure in
case unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher is not available on
journey, etc. In such a case, you don’t need to adjust the
engine specially.
In case of using unleaded petrol 90 RON, the engine performance level is reduced.
● Repeatedly driving short distance at low speeds can cause
deposits to form in the fuel system and engine, resulting in
poor starting and poor acceleration. If these problems
occur, you are advised to add a detergent additive to the
gasoline when you refuel the vehicle. The additive will
remove the deposits, thereby returning the engine to a normal condition. Be sure to use a genuine MITSUBISHI
FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable additive could make the engine malfunction. For details,
please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
● Poor quality petrol can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, engine noise and hesitation. If you experience these problems, try another brand and/or grade of
petrol.
If the check engine warning lamp flashes, have the system
checked as soon as possible at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, fuel that contains a mixture of
unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher, that meets the EN 228
fuel standard, and Bio ethanol E 85 can be used.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, the appropriate fuel is indicated on a label on the inside of the fuel tank filler door.
General information
● For Clear Tec FFV models, the engine performance level
will be the same regardless of whether unleaded petrol 95
RON or higher or high-quality Bio ethanol E 85 is used.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, when the vehicle is to be left
unused for a long period of time, it is recommended that
the Bio ethanol E 85 in the fuel tank is replaced with
unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher.
Filling the fuel tank
E00200202012
!
WARNING
● Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You
could be burned or seriously injured when handling
it. When refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames, sparks, and
smoking materials. Always handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor areas.
● Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to get rid of
your body’s static electricity by touching a metal
part of either the car or the fuel pump. Any static
electricity on your body could create a spark that
ignites fuel vapor.
● Perform the whole refueling process (opening the
fuel tank filler door, removing the fuel cap, etc.) by
yourself. Do not let any other person come near the
fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to help you
and that person was carrying static electricity, fuel
vapor could be ignited.
● Do not move away from the fuel tank filler until
refueling is finished. If you moved away and did
something else (for example, cleaning your windscreen) partway through the refueling process, you
could pick up a fresh charge of static electricity.
● Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel contains
toxic substances.
● Keep the doors and windows closed while refueling
the vehicle. If they were open, fuel vapor could get
into the cabin.
3
General information
Fuel tank capacity
47 litres
Refueling
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left side of your
vehicle.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened from inside the
vehicle with the fuel tank filler door release lever located
the side of the driver’s seat.
LHD
4
RHD
General information
3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turning the cap
anticlockwise.
4. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly on correct handling of the fuel filler gun. Do not tilt the gun. Insert the
gun in the tank port as far as it goes.
!
CAUTION
● A label which reads “UNLEADED FUEL ONLY” is
attached to the fuel tank filler lid of vehicles which
can only operate using unleaded petrol. Serious
engine and catalytic converter damage will result if
leaded petrol is filled into these vehicles, and consequently, this must never be attempted.
5. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill with fuel
any more.
A- Remove
B- Close
!
CAUTION
● Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
remove the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly. This
relieves any pressure or vacuum that might have
built up in the fuel tank. If the cap is venting vapor
or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before removing the cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, injuring you or others.
!
CAUTION
● To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “topoff” the fuel tank.
6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube cap slowly clockwise until you hear clicking sounds, then gently push the
fuel tank filler door closed.
!
CAUTION
● If you need to replace the fuel tank filler tube cap,
use only the cap specified for your model vehicle.
5
General information
NOTE
● For Clear Tec FFV models, the fuel in the fuel tank is
checked to determine the percentage of ethanol in the fuel
in order to control the engine properly.
To ensure the accuracy of the ethanol check, it is recommended that the vehicle is refueled with 10 litres or more
of fuel.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, acceleration performance may
drop on rare occasions during the fuel check after refueling. However, this does not indicate a malfunction and
the acceleration performance will return to normal if you
continue to drive the vehicle.
6
Installation of accessories
E00200300413
We recommend you to consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
● The installation of accessories, optional parts, should only
be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in your
country, and in accordance with the guidelines fitting
instructions and warnings contained within the documents
accompanying the parts or accessories.
● Improper installation of electrical components may cause
an electrical fire if incorrectly fitted. Please refer to the
“Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems”
section within this owner’s manual.
● Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the vehicle without an external antenna may cause electrical system interference, which could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.
● Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifications must
not be used.
Refer to the “Specifications” section for information
regarding wheel and tyre sizes.
General information
Important points!
Due to large number of accessory and replacement parts of different manufactures available in the market, it is not possible,
not only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS, but also a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point, to check whether the
attachment or installation of such parts affects the overall
safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.
Even when such parts are officially authorized, for example by
a “general operators permit” (an appraisal for the part) or
through the execution of the part in an officially approved manner of construction, or when a single operation permit following the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be
deduced from that alone, that the driving safety of your vehicles has not been affected.
Consider also that there basically exists no liability on the part
of the appraiser or the official. Only in case of parts
(MITSUBISHI MOTORS original replacement or exchange
parts as well as MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine accessories)
that are recommended and released by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point and that are attached or
installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point you can assume that optimal safety has been provided.
The same also pertains to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehicle with respect to the production specifications. For your own
safety, in such cases, you should only undertake modifications
according to the recommendations of a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Modification/alterations to the electrical or
fuel systems
E00200400267
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manufactured safe, high
quality vehicles. In order to maintain this safety and quality, it
is important that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any modifications carried out which involve the electrical or fuel systems, should be carried out in accordance with MITSUBISHI
MOTORS guidelines.
!
CAUTION
● If the wiring interferes with any part of the vehicle
bodywork or improper installation methods are
used, i.e. protective fuses not installed, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, possibly
resulting in an electrical fire or other failures that
may cause an accident.
7
General information
Genuine parts
Used engine oils safety instructions
and disposal information
E00200500574
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths to bring you
a superbly crafted automobile offering the highest quality and
dependability.
Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, designed and
manufactured to maintain your MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine
Parts are identified by this mark and are available at all
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Points.
E00200600025
!
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact may cause serious
skin disorders, including dermatitis and cancer.
● Avoid contact with the skin as far as possible and
wash thoroughly after any contact.
● Keep used engine oils out of reach of children.
Protect the environment
It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use
authorized waste collection facilities, including civic amenity
sites and garages providing facilities for disposal of used oil
and used oil filters. If in doubt, contact your local authority for
advice on disposal.
8
General information
Disposal information for used batteries
E00201300016
Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators.
Do not mix with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of
used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national
legislation and the Directives 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these batteries correctly, you will
help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from
inappropriate waste handling.
9
Locking and unlocking
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Electronic immobilizer
(Anti-theft starting system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Central door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Dead Lock System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1“Child-protection” rear doors (5-door models) . . .1Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Manual window control
(5-door models, rear door window only)* . . . . .1Electric window control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-
2
3
5
9
11
12
15
16
19
19
1
Locking and unlocking
Keys
NOTE
E00300101653
The key fits all locks.
1
!
WARNING
● When bringing a key on flights, do not press any
switches on the key while on the plane. If a switch is
pressed on the plane, the key emits electromagnetic
waves, which could adversely affect the plane’s
flight operation.
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful that no
switches on the key can be easily pressed by mistake.
1-2
● The key number is stamped on the tag as indicated in the
illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store the key and
key number tag in separate places, so that you can order a
key in the event the original keys are lost.
● The key is a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to
prevent a malfunction.
• Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to direct sunlight,
for example on the dashboard.
• Do not dissemble or modify.
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong
impact.
• Do not expose to water.
• Keep away from magnetic key holders.
• Keep away from audio systems, personal computers,
TVs, and any other equipment that generates a magnetic
field.
• Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or similar equipment.
• Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high
temperature or high humidity.
● The engine is designed so that it will not start if the ID
code registered in the immobilizer computer and the key’s
ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled “Electronic immobilizer” for details and key usage.
Locking and unlocking
Electronic immobilizer
(Anti-theft starting system)
The immobilizer indicator lamp comes on in the event of a
malfunction in the system electronics.
E00300201508
The electronic immobilizer is designed to reduce significantly
the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to
immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid
start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions), using a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle’s electronics.
1
1-3
Locking and unlocking
NOTE
1
● In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to
receive the registered ID code from the key. This means
the engine will not start even when the registered key is
turned to the “START” position.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or
magnetic object (Type A)
• When the key grip contacts metal of another key
(Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing
keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)
In cases like these, remove the object or additional key
from the vehicle key. Then try again to start the engine.
If the engine does not start, we recommend you to contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
1-4
Locking and unlocking
Keyless entry system
NOTE
● If you lose your key, order a key from your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point as soon as possible.
To obtain a replacement or extra spare key, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. All the keys have to
be re-registered in the immobilizer computer unit. The
immobilizer can register up to 8 different keys for use.
!
E00300301831
Press the remote control switch, and all doors and the tailgate
will be locked or unlocked as desired.
1
CAUTION
● Don’t make any alterations or additions to the
immobilizer system; alterations or additions could
cause failure of the immobilizer.
1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
To lock
Press the LOCK switch (1). All doors and the tailgate will be
locked. When they are locked with the turn-signal lamps blink
once.
NOTE
● With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, pressing the
LOCK switch (1) two times in succession causes the Dead
Lock System to be set. (Refer to “Setting the system” on
page 1-13.)
1-5
Locking and unlocking
1
To unlock
Operation of the Dead Lock System
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All doors and the tailgate will
be unlocked.
If they are unlocked while the room lamp is not illuminated,
the room lamp will be turned on for approximately 15 seconds
and the turn-signal lamps will blink twice.
With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it is possible to
set the Dead Lock System using the remote controller.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System’’ on page 1-12.)
NOTE
● If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and any of the doors
or tailgate is not opened within approximately 30 seconds:
relocking will automatically occur.
● It is possible to modify functions as follows:
For further information, contact your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
• The time from pressing of the UNLOCK switch (2) to
the moment of automatic locking can be changed.
• The confirmation function (flashing of the turn-signal
lamps) can be set to operate only when the doors and
tailgate are locked or only when the doors and tailgate
are unlocked.
• The confirmation function (this indicates locking or
unlocking of the doors and tailgate with the flash of the
turn-signal lamps) can be deactivated.
• The number of times the turn-signal lamps are flashed
by the confirmation function can be changed.
1-6
NOTE
● With a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, the keyless
entry system does not work while the key is in the ignition
switch.
● Pressing the LOCK switch (1) has no effect (no locking
takes place) while a door or the tailgate is open.
● The remote control switch will operate within about 4 m
from the vehicle. However, the operating range of the
remote control switch may change if the vehicle is located
near a TV transmitting tower, power station, or radio
broadcasting station.
● If the turn-signal lamps flash nine times when you press
the remote control switch, the battery may have run down.
For further information, please consult your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
If you replace the battery yourself, refer to “Procedure for
replacing the remote control switch battery” on page 1-7.
● If your remote control switch is lost or damaged, please
contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point for a replacement remote control switch.
● If you wish to add a remote control switch, we recommend you to contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
A maximum of 8 remote control switches are available for
your vehicle.
Locking and unlocking
Procedure for replacing the remote control
switch battery
E00309500031
2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
notch in the remote control switch case (B) and remove
the old battery.
1. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, insert a coin,
etc., into the notch in the remote control switch case and
use it to open the case.
1
NOTE
● Be sure to perform the procedure with the MITSUBISHI
mark facing you. If the MITSUBISHI mark is not facing
you when you open the remote control switch case, the
buttons may come out.
● When opening the remote control switch case, do not push
forcefully on the keyless button area (A). Otherwise, the
keyless circuit board may fall out and be damaged.
1-7
Locking and unlocking
3. Install a new battery with the + side (C) down, and then
close the remote control switch case firmly.
+ side
1
4. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works.
NOTE
● You may purchase a replacement battery at an electric
appliance store.
● A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
!
- side
Coin type battery
CR2016
NOTE
● Make sure you hear a “click” when you install the battery
and close the case.
1-8
CAUTION
● When the remote control switch case is opened, be
careful to keep water, dust, etc., out. Also, do not
touch the internal components.
Locking and unlocking
Doors
To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle
E00300401890
!
CAUTION
● Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors
incompletely closed is dangerous.
● Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
● Be careful not to lock the doors while the key is
inside the vehicle.
1
To lock or unlock with the key
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Pull the inside door handle towards you to open the door.
NOTE
1- Insert or remove the key
2- Lock
3- Unlock
● The driver’s door can be opened without using the lock
knob by pulling on the inside door handle.
All other doors and the tailgate are unlocked at the same
time.
● In a vehicle that has a Dead Lock System, it is not possible to unlock the door by pushing the lock knob to the
unlock side while the Dead Lock System is set.
(Refer to “Dead Lock System’’ on page 1-12.)
1-9
Locking and unlocking
To lock without using the key
Rear door (5-door models)
Front passenger’s door
1
Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position, and close
the door (2).
NOTE
● The driver’s door cannot be locked using the inside lock
knob while the driver’s door is opened.
1-10
Locking and unlocking
Central door locks
Front doors with key (LHD vehicles only)
E00300801445
NOTE
● Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked independently by using the inside lock knob.
● Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock
could activate the central door locking systems built-in
protection circuit and prevent the system from operating.
If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the
inside lock knob or the key.
Turn the key in the driver’s door towards the front of the vehicle to lock the doors and the tailgate and towards the rear of the
vehicle to unlock the doors and the tailgate.
1
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked and unlocked as
described hereafter.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
NOTE
● For RHD vehicles, turning the key in the front door will
not operate the central door locking system. Therefore,
use the keyless entry system instead. If the keyless entry
system does not operate, such as when the remote control
switch battery is discharged, use the key to unlock the
front door.
1-11
Locking and unlocking
Dead Lock System*
Driver’s door with inside lock knob
Set the inside lock knob on the driver’s door towards the front
of the vehicle to lock the doors and the tailgate. Set it towards
the rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors and the tailgate.
1
E00305100013
The Dead Lock System helps to prevent theft. When the keyless entry system has been used to lock all of the doors and the
tailgate, the Dead Lock System makes it impossible to unlock
the doors using the inside lock knobs.
!
CAUTION
● Do not set the Dead Lock System when someone is
inside the vehicle. With the Dead Lock System set, it
is not possible to unlock the doors using the inside
lock knobs. If you inadvertently set the Dead Lock
System, unlock the doors using the UNLOCK switch
of the keyless entry system.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1-12
Locking and unlocking
Setting the system
NOTE
E00305200115
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Get out of the vehicle. Close all of the doors and the tailgate.
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) of the keyless entry system to
lock all of the doors and the tailgate. The turn-signal
lamps will blink once.
4. Press the LOCK switch (A) again within 2 seconds. The
turn-signal lamps will blink three times to show that the
Dead Lock System has been set.
● Pressing the LOCK switch (A) once while the Dead Lock
System is set causes the turn-signal lamps to flash three
times, so it is possible to confirm that the Dead Lock System is set.
● It is possible to alter the system’s functionality as follows:
• It is possible to disable the operation confirmation function (flashing of the turn-signal lamps).
• It is possible to change the number of times the operation confirmation function causes the turn-signal lamps
to flash for confirmation of system operation.
For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
1-13
1
Locking and unlocking
Cancelling the system
E00305300031
When the UNLOCK switch (B) of the keyless entry system is
pressed to unlock the doors and tailgate, the Dead Lock System
is simultaneously cancelled.
1
● Even when it is not possible to use the keyless entry system to unlock the doors, it is possible to use the key to
unlock a door. When the key is used to unlock a door, the
Dead Lock System is cancelled for only that door. If you
wish to subsequently unlock all of the doors, turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position.
● It is possible to adjust the duration after which automatic
relocking takes place when the UNLOCK switch (B) has
been pressed. For details, please contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Testing the system
E00305400029
Open all of the door windows, then set the Dead Lock System.
(Refer to “Setting the system’’ on page 1-13.)
After setting the Dead Lock System, reach into the vehicle
through the windows and confirm that you cannot unlock the
doors using the lock knobs.
NOTE
NOTE
● If neither a door nor the tailgate is opened within 30 seconds of unlocking, the doors and tailgate are automatically relocked and the Dead Lock System is
simultaneously set again.
1-14
● If you need advice on how to set the Dead Lock System is
difficult to understand, please contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Locking and unlocking
“Child-protection” rear doors
(5-door models)
!
E00300900638
CAUTION
● When driving with a child in the rear seat, please
use the child protection to prevent accidental door
opening which may cause an accident.
1
1- Lock
2- Free
Child protection helps prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the rear seat.
A lever is provided on each rear door.
If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear door cannot be
opened using the inside handle.
To open the rear door while the child protection is in use, pull
the outside door handle.
If the lever is set to the “Free” position, the child protection
mechanism does not function.
1-15
Locking and unlocking
Tailgate
To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle
E00301400890
!
1
WARNING
The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by using the inside lock
knob (driver side), regardless of the position of the ignition
key.
● It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate open since
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can enter the cabin.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
● When opening and closing the tailgate, make sure
that there are no people nearby and be careful not to
hit your head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.
!
CAUTION
● Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when loading
and unloading luggage. Heat from the exhaust could
lead to burns.
NOTE
● Locking/unlocking of the driver’s door by using the key
(LHD vehicles only), inside lock knob (driver side) or
keyless entry system also locks/unlocks the tailgate.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
If the tailgate is locked or unlocked by using the inside lock
knob (driver side), it can still be locked or unlocked with the
key.
NOTE
● Repeated continuous operating between lock and unlock
could cause the central door locks’ built-in protection circuit to prevent the system from operating. If this occurs,
wait about 1 minute before operating the knob.
1-16
Locking and unlocking
To open
To close
Pull the tailgate lever upward to open the tailgate.
Pull the tailgate grip (A) downward as illustrated and release it
before the tailgate closes completely. Gently slam the tailgate
from the outside so that it is completely closed.
3-door models
1
!
CAUTION
● Make sure there is no one standing nearby when
opening the tailgate.
1-17
Locking and unlocking
5-door models
1
!
CAUTION
● To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not attempt
to close the tailgate without letting go off the tailgate
grip.
● Before driving, make sure that the tailgate is
securely closed.
If the tailgate opens while driving the vehicle,
objects stored in the luggage area could fall out onto
the road.
1-18
NOTE
● Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations illustrated to
support the tailgate. Please observe the following in order
to prevent damage or faulty operation.
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing the tailgate.
Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, etc., to the gas
struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
Locking and unlocking
Manual window control
(5-door models, rear door window only)*
E00302100083
Electric window control
E00302200042
The electric windows can only be operated with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position.
Electric window control switch
E00302301330
Each door window opens or closes while the corresponding
switch is operated.
LHD
1- To open
2- To close
1-19
1
Locking and unlocking
NOTE
RHD
● Repeated operation with the engine stopped will run down
the battery. Operate the window switches only while the
engine is running.
Driver’s switches
The driver’s switches can be used to operate all door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the
switch to close it.
If the switch for the driver’s window is fully pressed down, the
door window automatically opens completely.
If you want to stop the window movement, pull up the switch.
1
12345!
Driver’s door window
Front passenger’s door window
Rear left door window (5-door models)*
Rear right door window (5-door models)*
Lock switch
WARNING
● Before operating the electric window control, make
sure that nothing is capable of being trapped (head,
hand, finger, etc.).
● Never leave the vehicle without removing the key.
● Never leave a child (or other person who might not
be capable of safe operation of the electric window
control) in the vehicle alone.
● The child may tamper with the switch at the risk of
its hands or head being trapped in the window.
1-20
Locking and unlocking
Passenger’s switches
The passenger’s switches can be used to operate the corresponding passenger’s door windows.
Press the switch down for opening the window, and pull up the
switch for closing.
1- Open (down)
2- Close (up)
NOTE
● The rear door windows (5-door models) only open halfway.
Lock switch
E00303100413
When this switch is operated, the passenger’s switches cannot
be used to open or close the door windows and the driver’s
switch cannot open or close any door windows other than the
driver’s door windows.
To unlock, press it once again.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
!
WARNING
● A child may tamper with the switch at the risk of its
hands or head being trapped in the window. When
driving with a child in the vehicle, please press the
window lock switch to disable the passenger’s
switches.
1-21
1
Seat and seat belts
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Seat arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Making a luggage area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Pregnant women restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Seat belt pre-tensioner system and
force limiter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Child restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Seat belt inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag . . . .2-
2
3
4
5
8
11
15
20
20
22
35
36
2
Seat and seat belts
Seat
E00400101380
2
1-Front seat
● To adjust forward or backward → P. 2-5
● To recline the seatback → P. 2-5
● To adjust seat height* → P. 2-6
● To get in and out of the rear seat (3-door models) → P. 2-6
● Heated seats* → P. 2-7
2-2
2-Rear seat
● Folding the rear seat → P. 2-12
Seat and seat belts
Seat arrangement
E00400200603
By operating the seats select the desired seats arrangement.
Normal usage
2
How to stow large articles (Folding the rear seat)
2-3
Seat and seat belts
Seat adjustment
E00400300486
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable and that
you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, switches etc. while
retaining a clear field of vision.
!
2
WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This
can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an
accident. After seat operations are made, ensure the
seating is locked in position by attempting to move
the seat and seatback forward and rearward without using the adjusting mechanism.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in the luggage area
of a vehicle. Also, the luggage area and rear seats
should never be used as a play area by children. In a
collision, people or children riding unrestrained in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people or children to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts, and make sure that everyone travelling in
your vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or in
the case of a child is strapped in a child restraint.
2-4
!
WARNING
● To minimize the risk of personal injury in the event
of a collision or sudden braking, the seatbacks
should always be in the almost upright position
while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts may be reduced significantly
when the seatback is reclined. There is greater risk
that the passenger will slide under the seat belt,
resulting in serious injury, when the seatback is
reclined.
!
CAUTION
● Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or with
adult supervision for correct and safe operation.
● Do not place a cushion or the like between your back
and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of
the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an
accident.
● When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your
hand or foot.
● When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay
careful attention to the rear seat passengers.
Seat and seat belts
Front seat
To recline the seatback
E00400400012
To adjust forward or backward
E00400500505
Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat forward or
backward to the desired position. After adjustment, release the
adjusting lever to lock the seat in position.
E00400600623
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the
seatback lock lever up, and then lean backward to the desired
position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in that
position.
2
!
!
WARNING
● To ensure the seat is locked securely, try to move the
seat forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.
CAUTION
● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring
loaded, causing it to return to the vertical position
when the lock lever is operated. When operating the
lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.
2-5
Seat and seat belts
To adjust seat height*
To get in and out of the rear seat (3-door models)
E00400700578
Adjust the seat height by repeatedly operating the lever.
E00401000060
The lever (A) can be used to make getting in and out easier.
2
1- Raise
2- Lower
Fold the seatback forward, then slide the entire seat forward.
To return the seat, slide the entire seat rearward and then raise
the seatback rearward to lock the seat in position.
!
WARNING
● Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback folded
forward. The seat is not retained with the seatback
in this position, so serious injuries could result in the
event of hard braking or a collision.
2-6
Seat and seat belts
!
CAUTION
● The reclining mechanism of the seatback is spring
loaded, causing it to return to the vertical position
when the lock lever is operated. When operating the
lever, sit close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.
Heated seats*
E00401100625
The heated seats can be operated with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position.
2
1- Heater high (for quick heating).
2- Heater off.
3- Heater low (to keep the seat warm).
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
!
CAUTION
● Operate in the high position for quick heating. Once
the seat is warm, set the heater to low to keep it
warm. Slight variations in seat temperature may be
felt while using the heated seats. This is caused by
the operation of the heater’s internal thermostat and
does not indicate a malfunction.
2-7
Seat and seat belts
!
2
● If the following types of persons use the heated seats,
they might become too hot or receive minor burns
(red skin, heat blisters, etc.):
• Children, elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
• People under the influence of alcohol or sleep
inducing medication (cold medicine, etc.)
● Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with
high heat insulation properties on the seat while
using the heater; this might cause the heater element
to overheat.
● Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be
malfunctioning during use.
NOTE
● Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into it.
● When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alcohol, or other organic solvents; these might damage the surface of the seat and also the heater element.
● If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it
to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater.
2-8
Head restraints
CAUTION
E00403301181
!
WARNING
● Driving without the head restraints in place can
cause you and your passengers serious injury or
death in an accident. To reduce the risk of injury in
an accident, always make sure the head restraints
are installed and properly positioned when the seat
is occupied.
● Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect the head restraint
performance by increasing the distance between
your head and the restraint.
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● When a person is in the seating position of the rear
seats, pull up the head restraint to a height at which
it locks in position. Be sure to make this adjustment
before starting to drive. Failure to observe this can
lead to serious injuries in the event of an impact.
To adjust the height
Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre of the
restraint is as close as possible to eye level to reduce the
chances of injury in the event of collision. Any person too tall
for the restraint to reach their seated eye level should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the
restraint, move it downward while pushing the height adjusting
knob (A) in the direction of the arrow. After adjustment, push
the head restraint downward and make sure that it is locked.
2-9
2
Seat and seat belts
To remove
Lift the head restraint with the height adjusting knob (A)
pushed in.
!
CAUTION
● Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the illustration, and also
lift the head restraints to ensure that they do not
come out of the seatback.
2
To install
Confirm that the head restraint is facing the correct direction,
and then insert it into the seatback while pressing the height
adjusting knob (A) in the direction indicated by the arrow.
!
CAUTION
● The head restraints for the front and rear seats differ in size. When installing head restraints, make
sure the front and rear head restraints are fitted in
their respective seats.
Failure to do so could cause serious injury if
involved in an accident.
2-10
Seat and seat belts
Making a luggage area
E00403400244
!
WARNING
● If required, always operate the seating before the
vehicle is in motion.
● After seat operations are made, ensure the seating is
locked in position by attempting to move the seat
and seatback forward and rearward without using
the adjusting mechanism.
● The luggage area in the rear of the vehicle should
never be used as a play area by children. Children
should be seated with seat belts fastened when the
vehicle is in motion. Be sure that the rear seatbacks
are returned to their fully upright position and
locked in place.
!
Folding the seatback forward (5-door models,
except for vehicles with turbocharger)
E00414500014
Front seat
To fold
Pull the seatback lock lever and fold the seatback forward until
it is held securely.
2
CAUTION
● Do not stack luggage above the seatback height.
Secure the luggage firmly.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due to
restricted rear vision or unrestrained objects entering the passenger compartment during sudden
braking.
● Make sure that the seat is operated by an adult. If it
is operated by a child, an unexpected accident might
occur.
● When folding the seat be sure not to catch your hand
or leg.
!
WARNING
● With the seatback folded forward, do not allow anyone to sit on that seat and do not allow a child to
play on it. Otherwise, any sudden braking could
result in serious injuries.
2-11
Seat and seat belts
To replace
1. Pull the seatback lock lever and raise the seatback until it
locks securely into place.
2. Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that it has actually
been secured.
Folding the rear seat
E00403700335
To create luggage space, you can fold the rear seat.
NOTE
● Each side of the rear seat can be folded independently of
the other.
To fold
1. Move the front seat to a position forward of the middle of
its fore-aft adjustment range. (Refer to “To adjust forward
or backward” on page 2-5.)
2. Place each rear seat head restraint in its lowest position.
(Refer to “Head restraints” on page 2-8.)
3. Pull the strap (A) on the rear of the cushion to flip the
cushion forward. Ensure the cushion is in the front most
position until it touches the floor.
2
OK
2-12
Seat and seat belts
4. Pull the seatback lock lever (B) and fold the seatback forward.
!
CAUTION
● Do not allow any person to sit on the folded seat, and
do not place luggage on the seat cushion. The seat’s
mounting fittings could bend under the weight,
making it impossible for the seat to be retained on
the vehicle.
● Do not put rubbish or other foreign matter on the
floor. Doing so could make it impossible for the seat
to be retained on the floor.
● When allowing anyone to sit on the rear seat with
the other part of the seat back folded forward,
always turn the seat cushion up as well.
Not doing so may cause a risk of injury while driving or in case of an accident.
OK
2-13
2
Seat and seat belts
To return
1. Raise the seatback until it locks. Next, push lightly on the
seat to confirm that it has been securely retained.
2
!
WARNING
● When raising the seatback to its original position, do
not pinch the seat belt between the seatback and the
latch. Damage to the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the belt and could result in serious injury
in the event of a collision.
2-14
2. Lift up the center buckle and pull it through the seat cushion while pushing the rear of the seat cushion under the
seatback.
3. Push down on the front of the seat cushion until it locks
securely in place. Next, push and pull lightly on the seat to
confirm that it has been securely retained.
Seat and seat belts
Seat belts
E00404800607
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident,
it is important that the seat belts are worn correctly while driving.
The front seat belts have a pre-tensioner system. These belts
are used in the same way as a conventional seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force limiter system” on page 2-20.
!
WARNING
● Always place the shoulder belt over your shoulder
and across your chest. Never put it behind you or
under your arm.
● One seat belt should be used by only one person.
Doing otherwise can be dangerous.
● The seat belt will provide its wearer with maximum
protection if the recliner seatback is placed in the
fully upright position. When the seatback is
reclined, there is a greater risk that the passenger
will slide under the belt, especially in a forward
impact accident, and may be injured by the belt or
by striking the instrument panel or seatbacks.
● Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who
drives or rides in this vehicle, and by all children
who are large enough to wear seat belts properly.
● Remove any twists when using the belt.
● No modifications or additions should be made by the
user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting
devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.
● To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury in an
accident, including the deployment of the driver air
bag, the driver should adjust the driver’s seat to the
rearmost position that still allows good visibility and
good control of the steering wheel, the brake and
accelerator, and vehicle controls.
2-15
2
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● Never hold a child in your arms or on your lap when
travelling in this vehicle, even if you are wearing
your seat belt. To do so risks severe or fatal injury to
your child in a collision or sudden stop.
● Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
3-point type seat belt
(with emergency locking mechanism)
E00404901009
This type of belt requires no length adjustment. Once worn, the
belt adjusts itself to the movement of wearer, but in the event of
a sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically locks to hold
the wearer’s body.
To fasten
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate.
2
NOTE
● When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a locked condition, pull the belts once forcefully and then return them.
After that, pull the belts out slowly once again.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a “click” is
heard.
2-16
Seat and seat belts
!
CAUTION
● Never wear the lap portion of the belt across your
abdomen. During accidents it can press sharply
against abdomen and increase the risk of injury.
● The seat belts must not be twisted when worn.
To unfasten
Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buckle.
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as desired.
2
NOTE
● As the belt retracts automatically, keep the latch plate held
while retracting so that the belt stows slowly. Failure to do
so could damage the vehicle.
2-17
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt reminder/warning lamp
E00409800497
A tone and warning lamp are used to remind the driver and
front passenger to fasten the seat belt.
NOTE
● For the front passenger seat, the warning function works
only while a person is sitting on the seat.
2
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, the warning lamp will come on and a tone will sound for about 6 seconds. If the front seat belt remains unfastened approximately 1
minute later, the warning lamp will flash and the tone sound
intermittently (each 12 times) when the vehicle is driven. If the
passenger subsequently unfastens the seat belt while driving,
the warning lamp and tone will issue further warnings. And if
the seat belt remains unfastened, the warning lamp and tone
will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving
from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will
stop.
!
WARNING
● In order to reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury
in an accident, always wear your own seat belt. Do
not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or
she is also seated and wearing a seat belt. Children
should additionally be restrained in a secure child
restraint system.
NOTE
● When luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, depending on the weight and
position of the luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
and the warning lamp to come on.
2-18
Seat and seat belts
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats)
Rear seat belt storage
E00405000055
E00405300380
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock knob (A)
depressed. To move the anchor up, slide it without depressing
the lock knob (A).
When seat belt is not use, fold down or raise the rear seatback,
store the rear seat belt to the holder.
Anchor down
Anchor up
Seat belt plate storage
After passing the belt through the rear notch (A), insert the
plate into the front notch (B).
2
!
CAUTION
● When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it at a position that is sufficiently high to ensure that the belt
makes full contact with your shoulder but does not
touch your neck.
!
WARNING
● Secure the seat belt using the seat belt holder. If the
seat belt is not secured, it could be pinched between
the seatback and the latch when the seatback is
raised to its original position.
Damage to the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the belt and could result in serious injury in
the event of a collision.
2-19
Seat and seat belts
Pregnant women restraint
E00405600136
!
2
WARNING
● Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Pregnant women should use the available
seat belts. This will reduce the likelihood of injury to
both the woman and the unborn child. The lap belt
should be worn across the thighs and as snug against
the hips as possible, but not across the waist. Consult
your doctor if you have any additional questions or
concerns.
Seat belt pre-tensioner system and
force limiter system
E00405700010
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat each have a seat
belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system.
Pre-tensioner system
E00405801005
The pre-tensioner system will retract their respective seat belts
instantaneously, thus maximizing the seat belt’s effectiveness,
if there is a frontal impact severe enough to injure the driver
and/or front passenger and the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
The seat belt pre-tensioner includes the following components:
1- Air bag control unit
2- Front impact sensors
3- Seat belt pre-tensioners
2-20
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● To obtain the best results from your pre-tensioner
seat belt, make sure you do the following:
• Adjust the seat to the proper position.
Refer to “Front seat” on page 2-5.
• Fasten your seat belt properly.
Refer to “Seat belts” on page 2-15.
!
CAUTION
SRS warning lamp
E00405900038
This warning lamp is shared by the SRS air bags and the pretensioner seat belts.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp” on page 2-57.
Force limiter system
E00406000049
In the event of a collision, each force limiter system will effectively absorb the load applied to the seat belt so as to minimize
the impact to the passenger.
● Installation of audio equipment or repairs in the
vicinity of the pre-tensioner seat belts or floor console must be performed in line with MITSUBISHI
MOTORS guidelines. It is important to do so
because the work could affect the pre-tensioner systems.
● If you need to scrap the vehicle, please consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
It is important to do so because unexpected activation of the pre-tensioner seat belts could cause injuries.
NOTE
● The pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated if the vehicle
suffers a severe frontal impact, even if the seat belts are
not worn.
● The pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to work only
once. After the pre-tensioner seat belts have been activated, we recommend you to have them replaced by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2-21
2
Seat and seat belts
Child restraint
E00406401473
When transporting children in your vehicle, some type of child
restraint system should always be used according to the size of
the child. This is required by law in most countries.
The regulations concerning driving with children in the front
seat may differ from country to country. You are advised to
comply with the relevant regulations.
2
!
The label shown here is attached on vehicles with front passenger airbag.
WARNING
● When possible, put children in the rear seat. Accident statistics indicate that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seat rather than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your arms is no substitute for a
restraint system. Failure to use a proper restraint
system can result in severe or fatal injury to your
child.
● Each child restraint device or fixing is to be used by
one child only.
● When attaching a child restraint to the rear seat,
place the front seatbacks in the upright position.
Otherwise, the child could be seriously injured in
the event of hard braking or a collision.
2-22
Caution for installing the child restraint on
vehicle with front passenger airbag
!
WARNING
● Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
must NOT be used in the front passenger seat if the
front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated.
The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child. A rearward facing child
restraint should be used in the rear seat.
NOTE
● If you have a rearward facing child restraint system that
cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger
seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an airbag
off” on page 2-43.)
Front passenger’s airbag OFF
2
Front passenger’s airbag ON
2-23
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
should be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if
used in the front seat, adjust the seat to the most
rearward position and turn off the front passenger’s
airbag ON-OFF switch.
Infants and small children
E00406600814
When transporting infants and small children in your vehicle,
follow the instruction given below.
2
Instruction:
● For small infants, an infant carrier should be used. For
small children whose height when seated allows the
shoulder belt to contact the face or the throat, a child seat
should be used.
● The child restraint system should be appropriate for your
child’s weight and height and properly fit the vehicle. For
a higher degree of safety: THE CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE REAR
SEAT.
2-24
Seat and seat belts
● Before purchasing a child restraint system, try installing it
in the rear seat to make sure there is a good fit. Because of
the location of the seat belt buckles and the shape of the
seat cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some
manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to
either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has
been tightened, choose another manufacturer’s child
restraint system.
!
NOTE
● Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the
child restraint system that you have, the child restraint can
be attached using one of the following two locations:
• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat ONLY if the
child restraint has ISOFIX mountings (see page 2-31).
• To the seat belt (see page 2-34).
2
WARNING
● When installing a child restraint system, refer to the
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
restraint system. Failure to do so can result in severe
or fatal injury to your child.
● After installation, push and pull the child restraint
system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it
is positively secured. If the child restraint system is
not installed securely, it may cause injury to the
child or other occupants in the case of accident or
sudden stops.
● When the child restraint system is not in use, keep
your child or infant seat secured with the seat belt or
remove it from the vehicle in order to prevent injury
to your child.
2-25
Seat and seat belts
Older children
E00406700248
Children who have outgrown the child restraint system should
be seated in the rear seat and wear a combination lap shoulder
belt.
The lap portion of the belt should be snug and positioned low
on the abdomen so that it is below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen during
an accident and cause injury.
2
!
CAUTION
● Children who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in an accident.
● Children who are not buckled up can strike other
people in the vehicle in an accident.
● A child should never be left unattended in your vehicle. When you leave the vehicle, take the child with
you.
2-26
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions
E00411400171
Mass Group
carrycot
0
0+
I
-Up to 10 kg
-Up to 13 kg
-9 to 18 kg
Size class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Front Passenger
Second Outboard
F
ISO/L1
X
X
G
ISO/L2
X
X
X
X
X
IL
X
X
E
ISO/R1
E
ISO/R1
X
IL
D
ISO/R2
X
IL
C
ISO/R3
X
X
X
X
X
IL
D
ISO/R2
C
ISO/R3
X
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
X
IUF, IL*1
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF
X
X
II
-15 to 25 kg
X
X
III
-22 to 36 kg
X
X
2
2-27
Seat and seat belts
Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:
● IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
● IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semiuniversal” categories.
● X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
IL (Genuine part information)
2
*1
NOTE
Genuine part No.
ECE No.
MZ313200
E1-04301133
● MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For detailed information, consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
2-28
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various seating positions
E00406800715
Seating Position
Front Passenger
Mass Group
Rear Outboard
Activated
Air Bag
Deactivated
Air Bag*1
3-door
models
5-door
models
Rear Centre
0
-Up to 10 kg (0-9 months)
X
U
U
U
X
0+
-Up to 13 kg (0-2 years)
X
U, L*2
U, L*2
U, L*2
X
I
-9 to 18 kg (9 months-4 years)
X
U, L*3
U, L*3
U, L*3
X
II & III
-15 to 36 kg (4-12 years)
X
U
U
U, L*4
X
2
*1: With front passenger’s air bag deactivated by means of front passenger’s air bag ON-OFF switch
Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:
● U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
● UF- Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
● L- Suitable for particular child restraints (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
● B- Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
● X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
2-29
Seat and seat belts
L (Genuine part information)
*2
3
*
Genuine parts No.
ECE No.
MZ312807
E1-04301146
MZ312745
E1-04301136
MZ313045
MZ313200
*4
2
MZ312808
E1-04301133
E1-04301148
NOTE
● The above suitability table applies to retention of child restraints using seat belts.
● When MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part No. MZ313200 is used on the rear seat, it can also be retained by means of ISOFIX child restraint mountings.
● There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg (0-9 months)”.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For detail information, consult your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2-30
Seat and seat belts
Installing a child restraint system to the lower
anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings)
and tether anchorage
E00408900462
Tether anchorage locations
There are 2 child restraint anchorage points located on the back
of the rear seatbacks. These are for fastening the child restraint
tether straps to the 2 rear seat seating positions.
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower anchorages for
attaching a child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings.
2
!
WARNING
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2-31
Seat and seat belts
Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings
E00409000529
The child restraint system is designed only for seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the child restraint system
using the lower anchorages.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint system using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Only a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine
child restraint system can be used.
Genuine parts No. :MZ313200
ECE No.
:E1-04301133
2
A: Child restraint system connectors
2-32
!
WARNING
● If a child restraint system other than a MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine one is used, it may not be
properly retained and the child could be seriously
injured as a result. Use only a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS genuine child restraint system.
Seat and seat belts
To install
1. Insert the child restraint system’s connectors (A) into the
slit (B) in accordance with the instructions provided by
the child restraint system’s manufacturer.
2. Remove the head restraint from the location in which you
wish to install a child restraint.
3. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child seat to the
tether anchor bar (G) and tighten the top tether strap hook
so it is securely fastened.
2
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Connector
Slit
Vehicle seatback
Vehicle seat cushion
Lower anchorage
4. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to
be sure it is firmly secured.
2-33
Seat and seat belts
!
2
WARNING
● If there is any foreign material in or around the connectors, remove it before installing the child
restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is
away from, not looped through or otherwise interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign
matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes
with the child restraint system, the child restraint
system will not be secured properly and could move
forward in the event of sudden braking or a collision, seriously injuring the child and possibly other
vehicle occupants.
● When the vehicle is moving do not adjust the seat
where the child restraint system is installed.
Installing a child restraint system to a 3-point
type seat belt (with emergency locking
mechanism)
E00408700529
To remove
Remove the child restraint in accordance with the instructions
provided by the child restraint system’s manufacturer.
Front passenger seat
Installation:
1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child restraint system.
Make sure you hear a “click” when you insert the latch
plate in the buckle.
2. Remove all slack by using the locking clip.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in all directions to be sure
it is secure.
2-34
Seat and seat belts
!
Seat belt inspection
CAUTION
● For some types of child restraint, the locking clip (A)
should be used to help avoid personal injury during
a collision or sudden manoeuvre.
It must be fitted and used in accordance with the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The locking clip must be removed when the child
restraint is removed.
E00406300563
● Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed webbing and for
cracked or deformed metallic parts. Replace the belt
assembly if defective.
● A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral detergent in
warm water. After rinsing in water, let it dry in the shade.
Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts because this
affects their characteristics.
!
2
WARNING
● We recommend that you have all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware
inspected after any collision. We recommend that
seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts
show no damage and continue to operate properly.
● Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the
seat belt assemblies; we recommend that you have
this work done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point. Incorrect repair or
replacement could reduce the effectiveness of the
belts and could result in serious injury in the event
of a collision.
● Once the pre-tensioner has been activated, it cannot
be re-used.
It must be replaced together with the retractor.
2-35
Seat and seat belts
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - airbag
!
E00407201670
2
The information written in this supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section contains important points concerning the driver,
front passenger, side and curtain airbags.
The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are designed to
supplement the primary protection of the driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by providing those occupants
with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are designed to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and front passenger
with protection against chest and abdomen injuries in certain
moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.
The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are designed to supplement the seat belts and provide the driver and passenger
with protection against head injuries in certain moderate-tosevere side impact collisions.
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; for maximum
protection in all types of crashes and accidents, seat belts
should ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in
this vehicle. (With infants and small children in child restraints
and older children buckled in the rear seat.)
2-36
WARNING
● IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS PROPERLY WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT, EVEN WITH
AN AIRBAG:
• Seat belts help keep the driver and passenger
properly positioned, which reduces injury risk in
all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious or
fatal injuries when the airbags inflate.
During sudden braking just before a collision, an
unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or
passenger can move forward into direct contact
with or within close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision.
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful which could cause serious or fatal injuries
if the occupant contacts it at this stage.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in roll-overs,
rear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal
collisions, because driver’s and passenger’s airbags are not designed to inflate in those situations.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from
your vehicle in a collision or roll-over.
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY
SEATED.
A driver or front passenger too close to the steering
wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured.
Airbags inflate very fast, and with great force.
If the driver and front passenger are not properly
seated and restrained, the airbags may not protect
you properly, and could cause serious or fatal injuries when it inflates.
• Before driving, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
as possible while still maintaining complete control
of the vehicle.
• Before driving, adjust the front passenger seat as
far back as possible.
• Make sure all vehicle occupants are always properly restrained using the available seat belts.
• With seat belts properly fastened, the driver and
passenger should sit well back and upright without
leaning against the window or door.
!
WARNING
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or lean head or
chest close to the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Do not put feet or legs on or against the instrument
panel.
● Place all infants and small children in the rear seat
and properly restrained using an appropriate child
restraint system.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
2-37
2
Seat and seat belts
!
2
WARNING
● Infants and small children should never be unrestrained, stand up against the instrument panel or
held in your arms or on your lap. They could be seriously injured or killed in a collision, including when
the airbag inflates. They should be properly seated
in the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint system. See the “Child restraint” section in this owner’s
manual.
!
WARNING
● A REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
must NOT be used in the front passenger seat if the
front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated.
The force of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
A rearward facing child restraint should be used in
the rear seat.
Front passenger’s airbag ON
2-38
Seat and seat belts
NOTE
● If you have a rearward facing child restraint system that
cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger
seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an airbag
off” on page 2-43.)
Front passenger’s airbag OFF
!
WARNING
● A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
should be used in the rear seat whenever possible; if
it must be used in the front passenger seat, adjust
the seat to the most rearward position and turn off
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. Failure to do so could kill or cause serious injuries to the
child.
2
!
WARNING
● Older children should be seated in the rear seat,
properly wearing the seat belt, with an appropriate
booster seat if needed.
2-39
Seat and seat belts
Caution for installing the child restraint on
vehicle with front passenger airbag
The label shown here is attached on vehicles with front passenger airbag.
How the supplemental restraint system works
E00407301206
The SRS includes the following components:
2
!
WARNING
● Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
2-40
123456-
Airbag module (Driver)
Front passenger’s airbag off indicator lamp
Airbag module (Passenger)
Front impact sensors
Airbag control unit
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
Seat and seat belts
When the impact sensors detect an impact of sufficient frontal
or side force, an automated circuit ignites materials in the inflator to generate gas and inflate the air bags.
The air bags deployment produces a sudden, loud noise, and
releases some smoke and powder, but these conditions are not
injurious, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. People with
respiratory problems may feel some temporary irritation from
chemicals used to produce the deployment; open the windows
after air bag deployment, if safe to do so.
The air bags deflate very rapidly after deployment, so there is
little danger of obscured vision.
The time required from the sensors detecting an impact to
deflation of the air bags after deployment is shorter than a blink
of an eye.
7- Side airbag modules*
8- Curtain airbag modules*
9- Side impact sensors*
The airbags will operate only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “START” position.
!
CAUTION
● Air bags inflate at an extremely rapid speed. In certain situations, contact with inflating air bags can
result in abrasions, light cuts, bruises, and the like.
2-41
2
Seat and seat belts
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
Front passenger’s airbag off indicator lamp
E00410100197
2
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can be used to
disable the front passenger’s airbag. If you have a child
restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the
front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s
airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an
airbag off” on page 2-43.)
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is located in the
glove box.
E00411500101
The front passenger’s airbag off indicator lamp is located in the
meter.
The indicator lamp normally comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off a few seconds later.
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned
OFF, the indicator lamp will stay on to show that the passenger
front airbag is not operational.
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned
ON, the indicator lamp goes off to show that the front passenger’s airbag is operational.
2-42
Seat and seat belts
To turn an airbag off
E00410600235
!
WARNING
● To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
• Always remove the key from the ignition switch
before operating a front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch. Failure to do so could adversely affect
the airbag performance.
• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after turning the
ignition switch from “ON” position to “LOCK”
position.
The SRS airbag system is designed to retain
enough voltage to deploy the airbag.
• Always remove the key from a front passenger’s
airbag ON-OFF switch after operating that switch.
Failure to do so could lead to improper position of
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch except when a child restraint system is
fitted to the front passenger seat.
• Turn ON the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch immediately after removing a child
restraint system from the passenger seat.
• If the indicator lamp does not come on when the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned
OFF, do not fit a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat. We recommend you to have the
system inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
!
WARNING
• If the indicator lamp remains on when the front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON,
do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger
seat. We recommend you to have the system
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:
1. Insert the key into the key opening of the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch, push the key inwards until
stopped by a touch and then turn the key from “ON” to
“OFF” position (anticlockwise).
2. Remove the key from the key opening of that the front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
2-43
2
Seat and seat belts
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn the ignition to “ON” position. The front passenger’s airbag off
indicator lamp will stay on.
2
The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivated and will not
deploy until switched on again.
2-44
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag system
E00407400213
The driver’s air bag is located under the padded cover in the
middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s air bag is
contained in the instrument panel above the glove box.
The driver’s air bag and the front passenger’s air bag are
designed to inflate at the same time even if the passenger seat
is not occupied.
Seat and seat belts
Deployment of front airbags
E00407501367
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speed of
approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher
Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
area between the arrows
2
The front airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is
shown in the illustration.
The front airbags will deploy if the severity of impact is above
the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximately
25 km/h (16 mph) collision when impacting straight into a
solid wall that does not move or deform. If the severity of the
impact is below the above threshold level, the front airbags
may not deploy. However, this threshold speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object that absorbs the
impact by either deforming or moving (for example, another
stationary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).
Because frontal collisions can easily move you out of position,
it is important to always properly wear your seat belts. Your
seat belts will help keep you in a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of
protection in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the
safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear your
seat belts.
2-45
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when…
With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehicle’s body
structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the
occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may
deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the front airbags may not deploy irrespective of
the deformation and damage to the vehicle body.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.
2
Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all
types of frontal collisions, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects
Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck
Oblique frontal impacts
2-46
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
when…
Rear end collisions
The front airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions
where they cannot typically provide protection to the occupant.
Such conditions are shown in the illustration.
Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all
types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat
belts.
2
Side collisions
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
2-47
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when…
The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage damage).
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.
2
Because the front airbags may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illustration that can easily move
you out of position, it is important to always properly wear
your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the
initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag
inflation is the most forceful and can possibly cause serious or
fatal injuries if you contact it at this stage.
Collision with an elevated median/island or kerb
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground
2-48
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● Do not attach anything to the steering wheel padded
cover, such as trim material, badges, etc. It might
strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
● Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the
instrument panel above the glove box. It might
strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
!
!
WARNING
● Do not put packages, pets or other objects between
the airbags and the driver or front passenger. It
could affect airbag performance, or could cause
injury when the airbag inflates.
● Right after the airbag inflation, several airbag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you
could be burned.
● The airbag system is designed to work only once.
Once the airbags have deployed, they will not work
again. They must promptly be replaced, and we recommend you to have the entire airbag system
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
WARNING
● Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of,
the windscreen. These objects could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant if the
airbags inflate.
2-49
2
Seat and seat belts
Side air bag system*
E00407600084
The side air bags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side air bag is designed to inflate only on the side of the
vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front
seat.
2
2-50
The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks with a side
air bag.
Seat and seat belts
Curtain air bag system*
Deployment of side air bags and curtain air bags
E00409100067
The curtain air bags are contained in the front pillars, rear pillars and roof side rail. The curtain air bag is designed to inflate
only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear seat.
E00407701024
The side air bags and curtain air bags ARE
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to deploy
when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe side impact to
the middle of the passenger compartment.
The typical condition is shown in the illustration.
2
The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The SRS side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore,
for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to
always properly wear your seat belts.
2-51
Seat and seat belts
The side air bags and curtain air bags MAY NOT
DEPLOY when…
2
With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may deform
significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the side air bags and curtain air bags may not deploy
irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle
body.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in the illustration.
Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the
occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compartment
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the
side of vehicle
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object
2-52
Seat and seat belts
Oblique side impacts
The side air bags and curtain air bags ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
The side air bags and curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in conditions where they cannot usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical conditions are shown in the illustration.
Head-on collisions
2
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Rear end collisions
2-53
Seat and seat belts
Because the side air bags and curtain air bags do not protect the
occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly
wear your seat belts.
!
2
WARNING
● The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed
to supplement the driver and passenger seat belts in
certain side impacts. Seat belts should always be
worn properly, and the driver and passenger should
sit well back and upright without leaning against the
window or door.
2-54
!
WARNING
● The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with
great force. The driver and passenger should not put
their arms out the window, and should not lean
against the door, in order to reduce risk of serious or
possible fatal injury from the deploying side air bags
and curtain air bags.
Seat and seat belts
!
WARNING
● Do not allow a child to kneel on the passenger seat
facing the passenger’s side door, since the side air
bags and curtain air bags inflate with great force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
!
WARNING
● Do not allow any rear seat occupant to hold onto the
seatback of either front seat, in order to reduce risk
of injury from the deploying side air bags. Special
care should be taken with children.
● Do not place any objects near or in front of the seatback of either front seat. They could interfere with
proper side air bag inflation, and also could cause
injury if thrown free by side air bag deployment.
● Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on
the seatback of either front seat. They could interfere with proper side air bag inflation.
● Do not install seat covers on seats with side air bags.
Do not re-cover seats that have side air bags. They
could interfere with proper side air bag inflation.
2-55
2
Seat and seat belts
!
2
WARNING
● Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other device
or object around the part where the curtain air bags
activate such as on the windscreen, side door glass,
front and rear pillars and roof side or assist grips.
When the curtain air bags inflate, the microphone
or other device or object will be hurled with great
force or the curtain air bags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
2-56
!
WARNING
● Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object
on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag was activated, any such item could be propelled away with
great force and could prevent the curtain air bag
from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly on the
coat hook (without using a hanger). Make sure there
are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of
clothes that you hang on the coat hook.
● Do not allow the child to lean against or close to the
front door even if the child is seated in a child
restraint system.
The child’s head should also not be leaned against or
be close to the area where the side air bags and curtain air bags are located. It is dangerous if the side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate.
Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead
to serious or fatal injury to the child.
● We recommend work around and on the side air
bags and curtain air bags system to be done by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Improper work could result inadvertent deployment
of a side air bags and curtain air bags, or could
render a side air bags and curtain air bags inoperative; either situation could result in serious injury.
Seat and seat belts
SRS warning lamp
E00407801214
There is a supplemental restraint system (“SRS”) warning lamp
on the instrument panel. The system checks itself and the lamp
tells you if there is a problem. When the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” or “START” position, the warning lamp should
illuminate for several seconds and then should go out. This
means the system is ready. If an SRS air bags or pre-tensioner
seat belt is not operating properly, the warning lamp comes on
and stays on and a buzzer sounds.
The SRS warning lamp is shared by the following:
● Driver’s air bag
● Front passenger’s air bag
● Side air bags*
● Curtain air bags*
● Seat belt pre-tensioners
● Front passenger’s air bag ON-OFF switch
!
WARNING
● If any of the following conditions occurs, the SRS
and/or seat belt pre-tensioners are not working
properly, and we recommend you to have it
inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point immediately.
• The SRS warning lamp does not illuminate when
you start the vehicle.
• The SRS warning lamp does not go out after several seconds.
• The SRS warning lamp illuminates while driving.
2-57
2
Seat and seat belts
SRS servicing
NOTE
E00407900784
!
2
WARNING
● We recommend any maintenance performed on or
near the components of the SRS to be performed by
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
Improper work on the SRS components or wiring
could result in inadvertent deployment of the air
bags, or could render the SRS inoperative; either
situation could result in serious injury.
● Do not modify your steering wheel, seat belt retractor or any other SRS components. For example,
replacement of the steering wheel, or modifications
to the front bumper or body structure can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.
● If your vehicle has received any damage, we recommend you to have the SRS inspected to ensure it is in
proper working order.
● On vehicles with the side air bags, do not modify
your front seats, centre pillar and centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to
possible injury.
Also, if you have found any tear or open seam in the
seat fabric at the portion near the side air bag, we
recommend you to have the seat inspected.
● On vehicles with the curtain air bags, if you have
found any scratch, crack or damage to the portion of
the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, we recommend you to have the SRS inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2-58
● When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to some other
person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is
equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applicable section in this owner’s manual.
● If you junk or scrap the vehicle, we urge you to first take
the vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point so that the SRS can be rendered safe.
Instruments and controls
Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Indicator lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Combination headlamps and dipper switch . . . . . .3Coming home light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Headlamp levelling switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Turn-signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Front fog lamp switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Rear fog lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Rear window demister switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Horn switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-
2
5
24
25
26
31
34
35
37
38
39
40
41
48
49
3
Instruments and controls
Instruments
E00500100762
3
1234-
3-2
Tachometer
Multi-information display
Speedometer
Multi-information meter switch
Instruments and controls
Speedometer
Indication for km/h and mph
E00500200819
Indication for km/h
The speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed in miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
3
3-3
Instruments and controls
Tachometer
E00500300735
The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min). The
tachometer can help you obtain more economical driving and
also warns you of excessive engine speeds.
3
!
CAUTION
● While driving, watch the tachometer to make sure
that the engine speed indicator does not rise into the
red zone (excessive engine rpm).
3-4
Instruments and controls
Multi-information display
E00519900362
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before operating. The following information is included on the multi-information display:
odometer, tripmeter, service reminder, fuel remaining, outside temperature, allshift lever position driving range, momentary and
average fuel consumption and average speed.
It is also possible to change elements such as the units used on the multi-information display.
When the ignition switch is “OFF”
When the ignition switch is “ON”
3
1- Information display (when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
→ P. 3-6
2- Information display (when the ignition switch is “ON”)
→ P. 3-8
3- Gearshift indicator* → P. 4-25, 4-29
4- Allshift lever position display* → P. 3-12
5- Frozen road warning → P. 3-12
6- Service reminder → P. 3-14
7- Outside temperature display → P. 3-12
8- Fuel remaining display → P. 3-13
NOTE
● The display is different depending on whether the ignition
switch is “OFF” or “ON”.
Refer to “Information display (when the ignition switch is
“OFF”)” on page 3-6.
Refer to “Information display (when the ignition switch is
“ON”)” on page 3-8.
3-5
Instruments and controls
Information display
(when the ignition switch is “OFF”)
E00528200013
Each time you lightly press the multi-information meter
switch, the display switches in the following order.
3
3-6
Instruments and controls
12345-
NOTE
Odometer
Tripmeter
Tripmeter
Service reminder (distance)
Service reminder (month)
Odometer
E00527800012
The odometer indicates the distance travelled.
● Both tripmeters
and
can count up to 9999.9 km
(6200 miles) (9999.9 miles).
When a tripmeter goes past 9999.9 km (6200 miles)
(9999.9 miles), it returns to 0.0 km (0 miles) (0.0 miles).
● When disconnecting the battery terminal, the memories of
tripmeter display
and display
are erased, and their
displays return to 0.0 km (0 miles) (0.0 miles).
Service reminder
Tripmeter
E00521300536
E00527900013
The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled between two
points.
This displays the distance and number of months
until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 3-14.
Example usage of tripmeter
and tripmeter
It is possible to measure two currently travelled distances,
from home using tripmeter
and from a particular point
on the way using tripmeter
.
To reset the tripmeter
To return the display to 0, hold down the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more. Only the currently
displayed value will be reset.
Example
If tripmeter
is displayed, only tripmeter
will be reset.
3-7
3
Instruments and controls
Information display (when the ignition switch is “ON”)
E00528300014
Each time you lightly press the multi-information meter switch in the meter or MODE/SET switch in the audio (if so equipped), the
display switches in the following order.
3
A: Lightly press the multi-information meter switch
B: Lightly press the MODE/SET switch
3-8
Instruments and controls
123456789-
Tripmeter
Odometer
Tripmeter
Tripmeter
Service reminder (distance)
Service reminder (month)
Driving range display*
Momentary fuel consumption display*
Average fuel consumption display*
Average speed display*
E00528000011
The operation method is the same as when the
ignition switch is “OFF”.
Refer to “Tripmeter” for further details on page
3-7.
Service reminder
E00521300552
NOTE
● Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-18.
● For vehicles that are not equipped with an audio system,
the driving range display, momentary fuel consumption
display, average fuel consumption display, and average
speed display cannot be displayed.
Odometer
E00527700011
The operation method is the same as when the
ignition switch is “OFF”.
Refer to “Odometer” for further details on page
3-7.
This displays the distance and number of months
until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 3-14.
3
Driving range display*
E00521500219
This displays the approximate driving range
(how many kilometres or miles you can drive).
When the driving range falls below approximately 50 km (31 miles), “---” is displayed.
Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
● The remaining distance is based on the previous fuel consumption data. The actual
distance will depend on the driving conditions (road conditions, how you drive, etc.).
When the battery terminal is disconnected,
the previous fuel consumption data is
erased. A value different from before may
be displayed. Treat the distance displayed
as just a rough guideline.
3-9
Instruments and controls
● When you refuel, the driving range display
is updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
● On rare occasions, the value displayed for
the driving range may change if you are
parked on an extremely steep incline. This
is due to the movement of fuel in the tank
and does not indicate any malfunction.
Momentary fuel consumption
display*
3
E00521800140
While driving, this displays the momentary fuel
consumption (in L/100 km (62 miles), km/L or
mpg). Calculation and indication of the value
begin when the vehicle speed rises above 6 km/h
(4 mph).
NOTE
● “---” is displayed when the momentary fuel
consumption cannot be measured.
● The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (L/100 km (62 miles),
km/L).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-18.
● For vehicles equipped with multi-information displays that show figures in miles, the
fuel consumption can only be displayed in
miles per gallon (“mpg”).
3-10
Average fuel consumption display*
E00521700295
This displays the average fuel consumption (in
L/100 km (62 miles), km/L, or mpg) from the
last reset to the present time.
There are the following 2 mode settings.
For information on how to change the average
fuel consumption display setting, refer to
“Changing the function settings (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on page 3-18.
Manual reset mode
● When the average fuel consumption is displayed, if you hold down the MODE/SET
switch, the average fuel consumption and
average speed displayed at that time are
reset.
● When the ignition switch is switched from
“ACC” or “LOCK” to “ON”, the mode setting is automatically switched from manual
to auto.
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
switching to manual mode is done, however, the data from the last reset is displayed.
Auto reset mode
● When the average fuel consumption is displayed, if you hold down the MODE/SET
switch, the average fuel consumption and
average speed displayed at that time are
reset.
Instruments and controls
● If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or
“LOCK” for about 4 hours or longer, the
average fuel consumption display is automatically reset.
NOTE
● “---” is displayed when the average fuel
consumption cannot be measured.
● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
● The average fuel consumption will depend
on the driving conditions (road conditions,
how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel
consumption may vary from the actual fuel
consumption. Treat the fuel consumption
displayed as just a rough guideline.
● The memory of the manual reset mode or
auto reset mode for the average fuel consumption display is erased if the battery is
disconnected.
● The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (L/100 km (62 miles),
km/L).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-18.
● For vehicles equipped with multi-information displays that show figures in miles, the
fuel consumption can only be displayed in
miles per gallon (“mpg”).
Average speed display*
E00521600308
This displays the average speed (km/h or mph)
from the last reset to the present time.
There are the following 2 mode settings.
For the method for changing the average speed
display setting, refer to “Changing the function
settings (when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-18.
Manual reset mode
● When the average speed is displayed, if you
hold down the MODE/SET switch, the
average speed and average fuel consumption displayed at that time are reset.
● When the ignition switch is switched from
“ACC” or “LOCK” to “ON”, the mode setting is automatically switched from manual
to auto.
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
switching to manual mode is done, however, the data from the last reset is displayed.
Auto reset mode
● When the average speed is displayed, if you
hold down the MODE/SET switch, the
average speed and average fuel consumption displayed at that time are reset.
● If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or
“LOCK” for about 4 hours or longer, the
average speed display is automatically
reset.
3-11
3
Instruments and controls
NOTE
● “---” is displayed when the average speed
cannot be measured.
● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
● The memory of the manual reset mode or
auto reset mode for the average speed display is erased if the battery is disconnected.
Allshift lever position display*
E00528100012
Shows the position of the allshift lever.
Refer to “Allshift lever position and multi-information display” on page 4-29.
3
Outside temperature display
E00528400015
This displays the temperature outside the vehicle.
NOTE
● The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°C or °F).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)” on
page 3-18.
● The outside temperature can be displayed in
a range of -40°C to 50°C (-40°F to 122°F).
● Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.
3-12
Frozen road warning
E00528500016
If the outside air temperature drops below
approx. 3°C, the alarm sounds and the outside air
temperature warning symbol flashes for about 10
seconds.
!
CAUTION
● There is a danger the road might be
icy, even when this symbol is not flashing, so please take care when driving.
Gearshift indicator*
E00528600020
The gearshift indicator (if so equipped) shows
recommended gearshift points for fuel-efficient
driving.
Refer to “Changing gears” on page 4-26.
Refer to “Driving” on page 4-34.
Instruments and controls
Fuel remaining display
NOTE
E00522200138
This displays the amount of fuel remaining.
● It may take several seconds to stabilise the display after
refilling the tank.
● If fuel is added with the ignition switch in the “ON” position, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate the fuel level.
Fuel lid mark
E00522300038
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank filler is located on
the left side of the body.
3
!
CAUTION
● Do not run out of fuel, or the catalytic converter
may be adversely affected. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
3-13
Instruments and controls
Service reminder
Fuel remaining warning display
E00522400215
If the remaining fuel level is approximately 7 liters or less (one
segment displayed) when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the last segment of the fuel gauge flashes. If the
remaining fuel level is approximately 4 liters or less (no segments displayed), “ “ and the bar graph flash.
One segment is displayed
No segments are displayed
3
NOTE
● On inclines or curves, the display may be incorrect due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.
3-14
E00522500388
Displays the approximate time until the next periodic inspection that MITSUBISHI MOTORS recommends. “---” is displayed when the inspection time has arrived.
NOTE
● Depending on the vehicle specifications, the displayed
time until the next periodic inspection may differ from
that which MITSUBISHI MOTORS recommends.
In addition, the display settings for the next periodic
inspection time can be modified.
To modify the display settings, have it adjusted at a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
For more details, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
Instruments and controls
Distance
2. Alerts the driver when the inspection time has arrived. We
recommend that you consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
At that time, when the ignition switch is switched from
“OFF” to “ON”, “ ” is displayed for 30 seconds on the
information display.
Month
3
1. Displays the time until the next periodic inspection.
NOTE
● The distance is shown in units of 100 km (62 miles) (100
miles). The time is shown in units of months.
3-15
Instruments and controls
3. After your vehicle is inspected at a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point, it displays the time
until the next periodic inspection.
1. When you lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the information display switches to
the service reminder display.
To reset
The “---” display can be reset while the ignition switch is
“OFF”. When the display is reset, the time until the next periodic inspection is displayed and “ ” is no longer displayed
when the ignition switch is switched from “OFF” to “ON”.
3
2. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to display “ ” and make it flash.
(If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display returns to the previous display.)
3-16
Instruments and controls
3. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch while
the icon is flashing to change the display from “---” to
“cLEAr”. After this, the time until the next periodic
inspection will be displayed.
!
CAUTION
● The customer is responsible for making sure that
periodic inspection and maintenance are performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be performed to
prevent accidents and malfunctions.
NOTE
● “---”display cannot be reset when the ignition switch is
“ON”.
● When “---” is displayed, after a certain distance and a certain period of time, the display is reset and the time until
the next periodic inspection is displayed.
● If you accidentally reset the display, we recommend that
you consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
3-17
3
Instruments and controls
Changing the function settings
(when the ignition switch is “ON”)*
Changing the reset mode for average fuel consumption
and average speed
E00522700146
The multi-information display fuel consumption unit, average
fuel consumption reset mode and speed reset mode and temperature unit, can be modified as desired.
!
3
CAUTION
● The driver should not operate the display while the
vehicle is in motion.
● When operating the system, stop the vehicle in a safe
area.
NOTE
● For vehicles equipped with multi-information displays
that show figures in miles, the fuel consumption can only
be displayed in miles per gallon (“mpg”).
3-18
E00522900281
The mode conditions for the average fuel consumption and
average speed display can be switched between “Auto reset”
and “Manual reset”.
1. When you lightly press the MODE/SET switch a few
times, the information display switches to the driving
range display.
Instruments and controls
2. Press and hold the MODE/SET switch for about 2 seconds
or more to display “A” and make it flash.
(If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display returns to the previous display.)
3. Lightly press the MODE/SET switch while the icon is
flashing to change the display from “A” to “B”.
The icon will stop flashing if there is no operation for
about 10 seconds or if the MODE/SET switch is pressed
and held.
3
A: Auto reset mode
B: Manual reset mode
4. The reset mode can be changed from “B” to “A” using the
same procedure.
3-19
Instruments and controls
Manual reset mode
• While the average fuel consumption or average speed is
being displayed, if you hold down the MODE/SET
switch, the average fuel consumption and average speed
displayed at that time are reset.
• When the ignition switch is switched from “ACC” or
“LOCK” to “ON”, the mode setting is automatically
switched from manual to auto.
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If you switch to
manual mode, however, the data from the last reset is
displayed.
3
Auto reset mode
• While the average fuel consumption or average speed is
being displayed, if you hold down the MODE/SET
switch, the average fuel consumption and average speed
displayed at that time are reset.
• If the ignition switch is at “ACC” or “LOCK” for about
4 hours or longer, the average fuel consumption display
and average speed display are automatically reset.
NOTE
● The memory of the manual reset mode or auto reset mode
for the average fuel consumption display and average
speed display is erased if the battery is disconnected.
● The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset mode”.
3-20
Changing the fuel consumption display unit
E00523000306
The display unit for fuel consumption can be switched. The
distance, speed, and amount units are also switched to match
the selected fuel consumption unit.
1. When you lightly press the MODE/SET switch a few
times, the information display switches to the momentary
fuel consumption display.
Instruments and controls
2. Press and hold the MODE/SET switch for about 2 seconds
or more to display “L/100 km (62 miles)” and make it
flash.
(If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display returns to the previous display.)
3. Lightly press the MODE/SET switch while the icon is
flashing to change the display from “L/100 km (62
miles)” to “km/L”.
The icon will stop flashing if there is no operation for
about 10 seconds or if the MODE/SET switch is pressed
and held.
3
4. The display unit can be changed from “km/L” to “L/100
km (62 miles)” using the same procedure.
3-21
Instruments and controls
NOTE
● The display units for the momentary fuel consumption,
the average fuel consumption are switched, but the units
for the indicating needle (speedometer), the odometer, the
tripmeter, the driving range and the average speed will
remain unchanged.
● The memory of the unit setting is erased if the battery is
disconnected, and it returns automatically to L/100 km
(62 miles).
3
3-22
Changing the temperature unit
E00523100206
The display unit for temperature can be switched.
1. When you lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the information display switches to
the odometer display.
Instruments and controls
2. Press and hold the multi-information meter switch for
about 2 seconds or more to display “°C” and make it flash.
(If there is no operation for about 10 seconds with flashing, the display returns to the previous display.)
3
3. Lightly press the multi-information meter switch while
the icon is flashing to change the display from “°C” to
“°F”.
The icon will stop flashing if there is no operation for
about 10 seconds or if the multi-information meter switch
is pressed and held.
4. The temperature unit can be changed from “°F” to “°C”
using the same procedure.
NOTE
● If the battery is disconnected, the unit setting is erased
from the memory and is automatically set to °C.
3-23
Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning lamps
E00501501731
3
1- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard warning indicator lamps
→ P. 3-25
2- Front fog lamp indicator lamp* → P. 3-25
3- High-beam indicator lamp → P. 3-25
4- Rear fog lamp indicator lamp → P. 3-25
5- High coolant temperature warning lamp → P. 3-30
6- Low coolant temperature indicator lamp → P. 3-26
7- Immobilizer indicator lamp → P. 1-3
8- Electric power steering warning lamp → P. 4-46
9- Check engine warning lamp → P. 3-28
10- Oil pressure warning lamp → P. 3-29
11- Charge warning lamp → P. 3-29
12- Traction control system (TCL)/Active stability control
system (ASC) indicator lamp* → P. 4-49
3-24
13- Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning lamp
→ P. 2-57
14- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF indicator lamp* → P. 4-24
15- Brake warning lamp → P. 3-26
16- Front passenger’s air bag off indicator lamp → P. 2-42
17- Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) indicator lamp* → P. 4-19
18- Seat belt warning lamp → P. 2-18
19- Anti-lock brake (ABS) warning lamp → P. 4-43
20- Door-ajar warning lamp → P. 3-30
21- Cruise control indicator lamp* → P. 4-52
Instruments and controls
Indicator lamps
High-beam indicator lamp
E00501600012
Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard
warning indicator lamps
E00501800072
This indicator lamp illuminates when the high
beam is used.
E00501700286
These indicator lamps blink in the following situations.
● When the turn-signal lever is moved to activate a turn-signal lamp.
Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page 3-37.
● When the hazard warning flasher switch is
pressed to activate the hazard warning
lamps.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on
page 3-38.
● When the hazard warning lamps automatically activate due to sudden braking while
driving.
Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” on
page 4-39.
Front fog lamp indicator lamp*
E00501900158
This indicator lamp illuminates while the front
fog lamps are on.
Rear fog lamp indication lamp
E00502000084
This indication lamp illuminates while the rear
fog lamp is on.
NOTE
● If these indicator lamps blink too fast due to
any operation other than sudden braking,
the cause may be a blown lamp bulb or a
faulty turn-signal connection.
3-25
3
Instruments and controls
Low coolant temperature indicator
lamp
E00502200028
When the engine coolant temperature is low, this
indicator lamp illuminates and then goes out
when the temperature rises to roughly 40 °C or
more.
NOTE
● When the indicator lamp goes out, this
should be used as a rough indication of
when the heating starts working.
● If the indicator lamp stays illuminated,
there may be a fault in the temperature sensor or other component. We recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected.
3
3-26
Warning lamps
E00502400017
Brake warning lamp
E00502501099
This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, and the lamp goes
off after a few seconds. Always make sure that
the lamp goes off before beginning to drive.
With the ignition switch “ON”, the brake warning lamp illuminates under the following conditions:
● When the parking brake lever has been
engaged.
With the ignition switch “ON”, the brake warning lamp illuminates and a buzzer sounds under
the following conditions:
● When the brake fluid level in the reservoir
falls to a low level.
● The vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h with the
parking brake applied.
Instruments and controls
!
CAUTION
● If either of the situations described
below occurs, there is a risk of reduced
brake effectiveness. Stop the vehicle in
a safe place and we recommend you to
have it checked.
• The brake warning lamp does not
illuminate when the parking brake is
applied or does not turn off when the
parking brake is released.
• The brake warning lamp remains
illuminated during driving.
● If the brake warning lamp comes on at
the same time as the ABS warning
lamp, the brake force distribution
function may be not working so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable. Avoid hard braking and highspeed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and we recommend you consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
!
CAUTION
● The vehicle should be brought to a halt
in the following manner when brake
performance has deteriorated.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than
usual. Even if the brake pedal moves
down to the very end of its possible
stroke, keep it pressed down hard.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine
braking to reduce your speed and
slowly pull the parking brake lever to
park your vehicle.
Depress the brake pedal to operate
the stop lamp (brake lamp) to alert
the vehicles behind you.
3-27
3
Instruments and controls
Check engine warning lamp
E00502601393
This lamp is part of an onboard diagnostic system which monitors the emissions, engine or
automated manual transmission control system /
AS&G control system.
If a problem is detected in one of these systems,
this lamp illuminates and a buzzer sounds.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, we recommend you to have
the system checked as soon as possible.
This lamp will also illuminate for a few seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. If it does not go off after a few seconds,
we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.
3
!
CAUTION
● Prolonged driving with this lamp on
may cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect
fuel economy and drivability.
● If the lamp does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, we recommend you to
have the system checked.
● If the lamp illuminates while the
engine is running, avoid driving at
high speeds and we recommend you to
have the system checked.
During vehicle operation with the
lamp illuminated, the vehicle may not
accelerate when you depress the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
● The engine electronic control module
accommodating the onboard diagnostic system has various fault data (especially about
the exhaust emission) stored.
This data will be erased if a battery cable is
disconnected which will make a rapid diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery
cable when the check engine warning lamp
is ON.
3-28
Instruments and controls
Charge warning lamp
Oil pressure warning lamp
E00502700036
E00502800053
This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, and the lamp goes
off after the engine has started.
In the event of a fault in the charging system, the
warning lamp comes on and a buzzer sounds.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, and the lamp goes
off after the engine has started. If it illuminates
and a buzzer sounds while the engine is running,
the oil pressure is too low.
If the warning lamp illuminates while the engine
is running, turn the engine off and have it
inspected.
!
CAUTION
● If the warning lamp illuminates and a
buzzer sounds while the engine is running, there is a problem in the charging system. In this case, immediately
park your vehicle in a safe place and
we recommend you to have it checked.
!
CAUTION
● If this lamp illuminates when the
engine oil level is not low, have it
inspected.
● This warning lamp does not indicate
the amount of oil in the crankcase.
This must be determined by checking
the oil level on the dipstick, while the
engine is switched off.
● If you continue driving with low engine
oil level or with this warning lamp illuminated, engine seizure may occur.
NOTE
● The oil pressure warning lamp should not
be treated as an indication of the engine’s
oil level. The oil level must be checked
using the dipstick.
3-29
3
Instruments and controls
High coolant temperature warning
lamp
E00503000023
This lamp illuminates and a buzzer sounds if the
coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
!
CAUTION
● If the lamp illuminates during vehicle
operation, it indicates that the engine is
possibly overheating. Continued driving could make the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and take appropriate action. (Refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 6-6.)
3
NOTE
● The high coolant temperature warning lamp
may illuminate when the vehicle has been
driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
flashing does not necessarily indicate a
problem. It should stop if you keep the
engine running for a while or continue driving the vehicle.
3-30
Door-ajar warning lamp
E00503300723
This lamp illuminates when a door or the tailgate
is either open or incompletely closed.
A buzzer sounds if the vehicle speed exceeds
5 km/h (3 mph) with a door or the tailgate ajar.
!
CAUTION
● Before moving your vehicle, check that
the warning lamp is OFF.
Instruments and controls
Combination headlamps and dipper switch
E00506000923
Type 1
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
Headlamps
NOTE
● Do not leave the headlamps and other lamps on for a long
time while the engine is stationary (not running). A rundown battery could result.
● When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the
inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the
same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a
humid day, and does not indicate a functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the
fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have it checked.
3
All lamps off
Position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps on
Headlamps and other lamps go on
3-31
Instruments and controls
Type 2
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
NOTE
● If the front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on when they
are supposed to with the switch in the “AUTO” position,
the lamps turn off automatically with the engine switch
off.
● Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to the windscreen. Also,
do not put any water-repellent coating on the windscreen.
3
All lamps off
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, headlamps, position, tail, licence plate, and instrument panel
AUTO lamps turn on and off automatically in accordance with
outside light level. All lamps turn off automatically
when the ignition switch is turned to “OFF” position.
Position, tail, licence plate and instrument panel lamps
on
Headlamps and other lamps go on
3-32
● If the lamps do not turn on or off with the switch in the
“AUTO” position, manually operate the switch and we
recommend you to have your vehicle checked.
[Vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp]
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp
switch is set to the “ ” (OFF) position, the low beam of the
headlamps, tail lamps, etc., will illuminate.
Instruments and controls
Lamp monitor buzzer
Dipper (High/Low beam change)
E00506100067
E00506200127
If the driver’s door is opened when the ignition key is in the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the ignition
switch while the lamps are on, a buzzer will sound to remind
the driver to turn off the lamps. Turn off the lamp switch to
stop the buzzer.
When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the beam
changes from high to low (or low to high) each time the lever is
pulled to (1). While the high beam is on, the high beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.
3
3-33
Instruments and controls
Coming home light
Headlamp flasher
E00506300043
The high beams flash when the lever is pulled slightly to (2),
and will go off when it is released.
When the high beam is on, the high beam indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster will also illuminate.
NOTE
3
● The high beams can also flash when the lamp switch is
OFF.
● If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps set to highbeam illumination, the headlamps are automatically
returned to their low-beam setting when the lamp switch
is next turned to the “ ” position.
3-34
E00528800019
This function turns on the headlamps in the low-beam setting
for about 30 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position and
remove the ignition key.
2. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position, pull the turn-signal lever toward you.
3. The headlamps will come on in the low-beam setting for
about 30 seconds.
NOTE
● The coming home light function operates only when the
combination headlamps and dipper switch is set to the
“ ” (OFF) or “AUTO” position.
● While the coming home light function is operating, perform one of the following operations to cancel the function and turn off the headlamps.
• Pull the turn-signal lever toward you.
• Turn the combination headlamps and dipper switch to
the “
” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position.
● If the coming home light function is cancelled, the ignition switch must be turned to the “ON” or “ACC” position
before the function can be operated again.
● It is possible to change the operating interval for the headlamps and to disable the function.
For details, we recommend that you consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Instruments and controls
Headlamp levelling switch
E00506400695
The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending upon the
load carried by the vehicle.
The headlamp levelling switch (A) can be used to adjust the
headlamp illumination distance (when the lower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’ glare does not distract the
drivers of approaching vehicles.
Set the switch (referring to the following table) to the appropriate position according to the number of people and the load in
the vehicle.
3
3-35
Instruments and controls
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
Vehicles with turbocharger
Vehicle
condition
Switch
position
3
Vehicle
condition
“0”
“2”
“3”
“3”
Switch
position
“0”
“1”
“2”
“2”
●:1 person
:Full luggage loading
●:1 person
:Full luggage loading
Switch position 0- Driver only/Driver + 1 front passenger
Switch position 2- 5 passengers (including driver)
Switch position 3- 5 passengers (including driver) + Full luggage
loading
Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage loading
Switch position 0- Driver only/Driver + 1 front passenger
Switch position 1- 5 passengers (including driver)
Switch position 2- 5 passengers (including driver) + Full luggage
loading
Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage loading
3-36
Instruments and controls
Turn-signal lever
NOTE
E00506501000
The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is operated (with
the ignition switch in the “ON” position). At the same time, the
turn signal indicator lamp flashes.
● If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the bulb in a turnsignal lamp may have burned out. We recommend you to
have the vehicle inspected.
3
1- Turn-signals
When making a normal turn, use position (1). The lever will
return automatically when cornering is completed.
There are times when the lever will not return after cornering. This occurs when the steering wheel is turned only
slightly.
In such cases, return the lever by hand.
2- Lane-change signals
When changing lane, gently move the lever once to position
(2). The turn-signal lamps and the indicator lamp in the
meter will flash three times.
3-37
Instruments and controls
Hazard warning flasher switch
NOTE
E00506600727
Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the vehicle has to
be parked on the road for any emergency.
The hazard warning flashers can always be operated, regardless of the position of the ignition key.
Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers; push
the switch again to turn them off.
When this switch is operated, all turn-signal lamps flash continuously, as do the turn-signal indicator lamps in the instrument cluster.
3
!
CAUTION
● If the lamps are kept flashing for a long time, the
battery will be discharged, resulting in hard engine
starting or no start condition.
3-38
● While the hazard warning lamps are blinking due to having manually pushed the switch, the Emergency stop signal does not operate.
Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” on page 4-39.
Instruments and controls
Front fog lamp switch*
E00506800820
The front fog lamps illuminate only when the headlamps or tail
lamps turn on. Push the switch to turn on the front fog lamps,
and push the switch again to turn them off.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate
while the front fog lamps are on.
● In case of vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp, the front
fog lamp can be operated even if the lamp switch is set to
the “ ” (OFF) position, because the low beam of the
headlamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ignition
key is at the “ON” position.
3
NOTE
● The front fog lamps are automatically turned off when the
headlamps and tail lamps turn off. To turn on the front fog
lamps again, push the switch again when the headlamps or
tail lamps turn on.
3-39
Instruments and controls
Rear fog lamp switch
E00506900296
Type 2
The rear fog lamps illuminate only when the headlamps or
front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on.
Push the switch to turn on the rear fog lamp, and push the
switch again to turn it off.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate
while the rear fog lamp is on.
Type 1
3
NOTE
● The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off when the
headlamps and front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn off.
To turn on the rear fog lamp again, push the switch again
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped)
turn on.
● In case of vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp, the rear
fog lamp can be operated even if the lamp switch is set to
the “ ” (OFF) position, because the low beam of the
headlamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ignition
key is at the “ON” position.
3-40
Instruments and controls
Wiper and washer switch
E00507101191
!
CAUTION
● If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer
fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which
may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the
defroster or rear window demister before using the
washer.
Windscreen wipers
E00516900127
Except for vehicle with rain sensor
E00527000072
The windscreen wiper and washer can be operated with the
ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the
wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
3
- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
- Off
--- - Intermittent (speed-sensitive)
1- Slow
2- Fast
3-41
Instruments and controls
To adjust intermittent intervals
With the lever in the “---” (speed-sensitive intermittent operation) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by
turning the knob (A).
Misting function
The misting function can be used when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
3
1- Fast
2- Slow
NOTE
● The speed-sensitive function of the windscreen wipers can
be deactivated.
For further information, please contact your authorized
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
3-42
The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is raised to the
“MIST” position and released. This operation is useful when it
is drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to operate while the
lever is held in the “ ” position.
Instruments and controls
Vehicle with rain sensor
E00526400138
The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ignition
switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not operate the
wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
Rain sensor*
Can only be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
If the lever is put in the “---” position, the rain sensor (A) will
detect the extent of rain (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.)
and the wipers will operate automatically.
Keep the lever in the “ ” (OFF) position if the windscreen is
dirty and the weather is dry.
Wiper operation under these conditions can scratch the windscreen and damage the wipers.
3
- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
- Off
--- - Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically operate depending on the
degree of wetness on the windscreen.
1- Slow
2- Fast
3-43
Instruments and controls
!
3
CAUTION
● With the ignition switch in the “ON” position and
the lever in the “---” position, the wipers may automatically operate in the situations described below.
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer injuries
or the wipers could malfunction. Be sure to turn the
ignition switch to the “OFF” position or move the
lever to the “ ” (OFF) position to deactivate the
rain sensor.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the windscreen, if you touch the rain sensor.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the windscreen, if you wipe the rain sensor with a cloth.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the windscreen.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sensor.
3-44
NOTE
● To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this operation of
the wipers does not take place when the vehicle is stationary and the ambient temperature is about 5 °C or lower.
● Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker or label to the
windscreen. Also, do not put any water-repellent coating
on the windscreen. The rain sensor would not be able to
detect the amount of rain, and the wipers might stop working normally.
● In the following cases, the rain sensor may be malfunctioning. For further information, please contact your
authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• When the wipers operate at a constant interval despite
changes in the amount of rain.
• When the wipers do not operate even though it is raining.
● The wipers may automatically operate when things such
as rain, dust, mud, insects, tree sap, oil or salt are affixed
to the windscreen on top of the rain sensor or when the
windscreen is frozen. (Wrong operation may also occur
due to strong electromagnetic waves, etc.) Objects affixed
to the windscreen will stop the wipers when the wipers
cannot remove them.
To make the wipers operate again, place the lever in the
“1” or “2” position.
● Contact an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
when replacing the windscreen or reinforcing the glass
around the sensor.
Instruments and controls
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
With the lever in the “---” (rain sensor) position, it is possible
to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor by turning the knob
(B).
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and release, to
operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in mist or drizzle.
3
1- Higher sensitivity to rain
2- Lower sensitivity to rain
NOTE
● It is possible to activate the following functions. For further information, please contact your authorized
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Automatic operation (rain droplet-sensitive) can be
changed to intermittent operation (vehicle speed-sensitive).
• Automatic operation (rain droplet-sensitive) can be
changed to intermittent operation (except vehicle speedsensitive).
The wipers will operate once if the lever is raised to the “ ”
position and released when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position. The wipers will continue to operate while
the lever is held in the “ ” position.
3-45
Instruments and controls
Windscreen washer
E00507200342
The windscreen washer can be operated with the ignition
switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. The wipers operate automatically
several times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
3
The wipers will operate once if the lever is moved to the “---”
position and the knob (C) is turned in the “1” direction when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
!
CAUTION
● If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer
fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze resulting
in poor visibility. Heat the glass with the defroster or
demister before using the washer.
NOTE
3-46
● It is possible to disable the function that causes the wipers
to operate when washer fluid is sprayed. For details, we
recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
Instruments and controls
Rear window wiper and washer
NOTE
E00507300532
The rear window wiper and washer switch can be operated
with the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
Turn the knob, and the rear window wiper and washer will
operate.
● It is possible to change the behaviour of functions as
detailed below. For details, we recommend you to consult
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
• It is possible to disable the function that causes the wipers to operate every time washer fluid is sprayed.
• It is possible to change the operating interval for intermittent operation of the rear wiper.
3
-
The wiper operates continuously for several seconds then
operates intermittently at intervals of about every 8 seconds.
Off
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window
when the knob is turned fully in either direction.
The wipers operate automatically several times while the
washer fluid is being sprayed.
3-47
Instruments and controls
Precautions to observe when using wipers and
washers
E00507600014
3
● If the moving wipers become blocked by ice or other
deposits on the glass, the motor may burn out even if the
wiper switch is turned to OFF. If obstruction occurs, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and
clean the deposits from the glass so that the wipers operate
smoothly.
● Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry. They may
scratch the glass surface or the blades may prematurely
wear out.
● Before using the wipers in cold weather, check that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the glass. The motor may
burn out if the wipers are used with the blades frozen onto
the glass.
● Avoid using the washer continuously for more than 20
seconds. Do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
● Periodically check the level of washer fluid in the reservoir and refill if required.
During cold weather, add a recommended washer solution
that will not freeze in the washer reservoir. Failure to do
so could result in loss of washer function and frost damage to the system components.
3-48
Rear window demister switch
E00507900990
The rear window demister switch can be operated with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position.
Push the switch to turn on the rear window demister. It will be
turned off automatically in about 20 minutes. To turn off the
demister within about 20 minutes, push the switch again.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on.
NOTE
● If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, these
operate in conjunction with the demister. Refer to “Heated
mirror” on page 4-13.
Instruments and controls
!
Horn switch
CAUTION
● The demister switch is not to melt snow but to clear
mist. Remove snow before use of the demister
switch.
● To avoid unnecessary discharge of the battery, do
not use the rear window demister during starting of
the engine or when the engine is not running. Turn
the demister off immediately after the window is
clear.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe gently along the heater wires,
being careful not to damage the wires.
● Do not allow objects to touch the inside of the rear
window glass, damaged or broken wires may result.
E00508000581
Pressing the “
to sound.
” mark on the steering wheel, causes the horn
3
3-49
Starting and driving
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Driving, alcohol and drugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Safe driving techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Running-in recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Inside rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Outside rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Steering wheel lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system* . . . . . . . . . . . .4Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Automated manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4How to drive a vehicle with automated
manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Emergency stop signal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-
2
3
3
5
6
8
9
10
10
14
15
16
19
25
28
33
38
39
40
41
45
Traction control system (TCL)/Active
stability control system (ASC)*. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Cargo loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-
47
50
58
58
4
Starting and driving
Economical driving
Speed
E00600100763
For economical driving, there are some technical requirements
that have to be met. The prerequisite for low fuel consumption
is a properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve longer life of
the vehicle and the most economical operation, we recommend
that you have the vehicle checked at regular intervals in
accordance with the service standards.
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and noise are
greatly influenced by personal driving habits as well as the particular operating conditions. The following points should be
observed in order to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine
as well as to reduce environmental pollution.
Starting
4
Avoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such operation will
result in higher fuel consumption.
Shifting
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine speed. Always
use the highest gear possible.
City traffic
Frequent starting and stopping increases the average fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When driving on congested roads, avoid use of a low gear
at high engine speeds.
Idling
The vehicle consumes fuel even when idling. Avoid extended
idling whenever possible.
4-2
The higher the vehicle speed, the more fuel is consumed. Avoid
driving at full speed. Even a slight release of the accelerator
pedal will save a significant amount of fuel.
Tyre inflation pressure
Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular intervals. Low tyre
inflation pressure increases road resistance and fuel consumption. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear
and driving stability.
Load
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the luggage compartment. Especially during city driving, where frequent starting
and stopping is necessary, the increased weight of the vehicle
will greatly affect fuel consumption. Avoid driving with unnecessary luggage, etc., on the roof; the increased air resistance
will increase fuel consumption.
Cold engine starting
Starting a cold engine consumes more fuel.
Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by keeping a hot
engine running. After the engine has started, commence driving as soon as possible.
Air conditioning*
The use of the air conditioning will increase fuel consumption.
Starting and driving
Driving, alcohol and drugs
Safe driving techniques
E00600200012
E00600300390
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab or a friend, or use public transportation.
Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you
sober.
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your
alertness, perception and reaction time. Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of
any of these medications.
Driving safety and protection against injury cannot be fully
ensured. However, we recommend that you pay extra attention
to the following:
!
Seat belts
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and your passengers have fastened your seat belts.
WARNING
4
● NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are
slower and your judgment is impaired.
4-3
Starting and driving
Floor mats
!
WARNING
● Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly laying floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle.
To prevent the floor mats from slipping out of position, securely retain them using the hook, etc.
Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal or laying
one floor mat on top of another can obstruct pedal
operation and lead to a serious accident.
Carrying children in the vehicle
● Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key and
children inside the vehicle. Children may play with the
driving controls and this could lead to an accident.
● Make sure that infants and small children are properly
restrained in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, and for maximum protection in the event of an accident.
● Prevent children from playing in the luggage compartment. It is highly dangerous to allow children to play there
while the vehicle is moving.
Loading luggage
When loading luggage, be careful not to load above the height
of the seats. This is dangerous not only because rearward
vision will be obstructed, but also because the luggage may be
projected into the passenger compartment under hard braking.
4
4-4
Starting and driving
Running-in recommendations
Vehicles with manual transmission
E00600401747
During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km (620 miles),
it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following
precautions as a guideline to aid long life as well as future
economy and performance.
● Do not race the engine at high speeds.
● Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged
high-speed running.
● Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be
adhered to.
● Do not exceed loading limits.
● Refrain from towing a trailer.
Speed limit
Shift
point
1100 models
1300 models
Except for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Except for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
1st gear
30 km/h
(19 mph)
30 km/h
(19 mph)
30 km/h
(19 mph)
35 km/h
(22 mph)
2nd gear
50 km/h
(31 mph)
55 km/h
(34 mph)
55 km/h
(34 mph)
60 km/h
(37 mph)
3rd gear
80 km/h
(50 mph)
85 km/h
(53 mph)
85 km/h
(53 mph)
90 km/h
(56 mph)
4th gear
110 km/h
(68 mph)
115 km/h
(71 mph)
115 km/h
(71 mph)
125 km/h
(78 mph)
5th gear
135 km/h
(84 mph)
140 km/h
(87 mph)
140 km/h
(87 mph)
155 km/h
(96 mph)
4-5
4
Starting and driving
Parking brake
Speed limit
E00600501113
1500 models
Shift point
Except for vehicles
with turbocharger
Vehicles with
turbocharger
1st gear
30 km/h (19 mph)
35 km/h (22 mph)
2nd gear
55 km/h (34 mph)
65 km/h (40 mph)
3rd gear
85 km/h (53 mph)
90 km/h (56 mph)
4th gear
115 km/h (71 mph)
120 km/h (75 mph)
5th gear
140 km/h (87 mph)
150 km/h (93 mph)
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully
engage the parking brake, and then move the gearshift lever to
1st (for uphill) or “R” (Reverse) position (for downhill), for
vehicles with manual transmission or move the allshift lever to
“S” (Stand by) position (uphill) or “R” (Reverse) position
(downhill) on automated manual transmission vehicles.
To apply
Vehicles with automated manual transmission
4
Shift point
Speed limit
1st gear
30 km/h (19 mph)
2nd gear
50 km/h (31 mph)
3rd gear
80 km/h (50 mph)
4th gear
105 km/h (65 mph)
5th gear
130 km/h (81 mph)
6th gear
155 km/h (96 mph)
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of the
hand grip.
4-6
Starting and driving
!
CAUTION
● When you intend to apply the parking brake, firmly
press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete stop before pulling the parking brake lever.
Pulling the parking brake lever with the vehicle
moving could make the rear wheels lock up, thereby
making the vehicle unstable.
To release
!
CAUTION
● Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is
fully released and the brake warning lamp is off.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking
brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in
ineffective braking and possible brake failure.
● If the brake warning lamp does not extinguish when
the parking brake is fully released, the brake system
may be abnormal. For details, refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-26.
4
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of the hand grip.
3- Push the lever downward.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake and turn the
front wheels towards the kerb on a downhill grade, away from
the kerb on an uphill grade.
4-7
Starting and driving
Parking
Parking with the engine running
E00600601228
Parking on a hill
To prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street, follow these
procedures:
Parking facing downhill
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move the vehicle
forward until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb.
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the “R”
(Reverse) position (with manual transmission) or the allshift
lever into the “R” (Reverse) position (with automated manual
transmission).
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
4
Parking facing uphill
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and move the vehicle
back until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb.
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever into the 1st
position (with manual transmission) or the allshift lever into
the “S” (Stand by) position (with automated manual transmission).
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
NOTE
● If your vehicle has an automated manual transmission,
place the allshift lever in the “S” (Stand by) position or
“R” (Reverse) position before stopping the engine.
If you move the allshift lever after stopping the engine, a
gearshift will not take place.
4-8
Never leave the engine running while you take a short
sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine running in a closed or
poorly ventilated place.
!
WARNING
● Leaving the engine running risks injury or death
from accidentally moving the gearshift lever (manual transmission) or the allshift lever (automated
manual transmission) or the accumulation of toxic
exhaust fumes in the passenger compartment.
Where you park
Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it over kerbs
or parking stop blocks. Be careful when travelling up or down
steep slopes where your bumper can scrape the road.
!
WARNING
● Do not park your vehicle in areas where combustible
materials such as dry grass or leaves can come in
contact with a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
When leaving the vehicle
Always remove the key from the ignition switch and lock all
doors and the tailgate when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.
Starting and driving
Steering wheel height adjustment
E00600700466
To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt lock lever
while holding the steering wheel by hand, and raise or lower
the steering wheel to the desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling it upward.
!
WARNING
● When releasing the tilt lock lever, move it to the
release position (2) and hold the steering wheel by
hand to prevent it falling to the lowest position.
4
1- Locked
2- Release
!
WARNING
● After adjusting to the desired height, check that the
lever is locked.
● Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while
you are driving the vehicle.
4-9
Starting and driving
Inside rear-view mirror
Outside rear-view mirrors
E00600800047
The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust
the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlamps of vehicles
behind you during night driving.
E00600900442
Compound curved-surface mirror
(LHD vehicles only)
On the driver’s seat side, a compound curved-surface mirror is
used, while on the front passenger’s seat side, a single curvedsurface mirror is used.
4
1- Normal
2- Anti-glare
!
WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirrors while
driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
4-10
1- Compound curved-surface mirror
2- Single curved-surface mirror
While the single curved-surface mirror has a fixed curvature,
the compound curved-surface mirror has different curvatures
between the inner and outer sides of the boundary line (A).
The inner side of the boundary line provides the same vision as
that available from an ordinary door mirror.
Starting and driving
However, the outer side of the boundary line provides a wider
vision than an ordinary door mirror.
!
WARNING
Manual remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors*
Adjust the mirror position by operating the lever as indicated
by the arrows.
● The sense of distance that you get from an object
you see on the inner side of the mirror boundary line
differs from the sense of distance that you get from
an object you see on the outer side.
An object you see on the outer side of the boundary
line of the mirror will look farther away than actually is (farther away than if you see in a normal flat
mirror) as compared with an object you see on the
inner side.
To adjust the mirror position
4
E00601000570
!
WARNING
● Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view mirrors while
driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
● Your vehicle is equipped with convex type mirrors.
Please take this into account. Objects you see in the
mirror will look smaller and farther away compared
to a normal flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.
1234-
Up
Down
Right
Left
4-11
Starting and driving
Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors*
E00610900054
The electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors can be
operated when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
2. Adjust the mirror by moving the switch left, right, up or
down.
1. Turn the switch to the same side as the mirror whose
adjustment is desired.
4
1234L- Left outside mirror adjustment
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
NOTE
● After adjustment, return the switch to centre position.
4-12
Up
Down
Right
Left
Starting and driving
To fold the mirror
Heated mirror*
E00601100454
E00601200413
The outside mirror can be folded in towards the side window to
prevent damage when parking in narrow areas.
When the rear window demister switch is pressed, the outside
rear-view mirrors are demisted or defrosted. Current will flow
through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing
away frost or condensation.
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while the demister is on.
The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes.
4
4-13
Starting and driving
Ignition switch
NOTE
E00601401500
● For vehicles equipped with the Daytime Running Lamp,
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”, the headlamp low
beams etc. are turned on.
Refer to “Headlamps” on page 3-31.
● Your vehicle equipped with an electronic immobilizer, to
start the engine, the ID code which the transponder inside
the key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to page 1-3.)
To remove the key
When removing the key, turn the key to “LOCK” position and
remove it.
4
LOCK
The engine is stopped and the steering wheel locked. The key
can only be inserted and removed only when the switch is in
this position.
ACC
The engine is stopped, but the radio, accessory socket and
other electrical devices can be operated.
ON
The engine is running, and all the vehicle’s electrical devices
can be operated.
START
The starter motor operates. After the engine has started, release
the key and it will automatically return to the “ON” position.
4-14
Starting and driving
!
Steering wheel lock
CAUTION
E00601500605
● Do not remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch while driving. The steering wheel will locked,
causing loss of control.
● If the engine is stopped while driving, the brake servomechanism will cease to function and braking
efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering
system will not function and it will require greater
manual effort to operate the steering.
● Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for a long
time when the engine is not running, doing so will
cause the battery to be discharged.
● Do not turn the key to the “START” position when
the engine is running, doing so could damage the
starter motor.
4
To lock
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
To unlock
Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving the steering
wheel slightly.
!
CAUTION
● Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
4-15
Starting and driving
Starting
NOTE
● If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may
sometimes make it difficult to turn the key from “LOCK”
to “ACC”. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
4
E00601600912
Tips for starting
● Do not operate the starter motor continuously for longer
than 10 seconds; doing so could run down the battery. If
the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch back to
“LOCK”, wait a few seconds, and then try again.
Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still turning will
damage the starter mechanism.
● If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak
or dead, refer to the “Emergency starting” section for
instructions on starting the engine.
● The engine is well warmed up with the engine speed
decreases. Extended warming-up operation will result in
excessive fuel consumption.
!
WARNING
● Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated
area any longer than is needed to move your vehicle
in or out of the area. Carbon monoxide gases are
odourless and can be fatal.
4-16
Starting and driving
!
CAUTION
● Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle. This can be very dangerous.
● Do not run the engine at high rpm or drive the vehicle at high speed until the engine has had a chance to
warm up.
● Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts
to avoid damaging the starter motor.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a turbocharger, do
not stop the engine immediately after high-speed or
uphill driving. First allow the engine to idle to give
the turbocharger a chance to cool down.
Starting the engine
E00601701688
This vehicles is equipped with an electronically controlled fuel
injection system which is automatically controlled. When starting the engine, do not depress the accelerator pedal.
The starting procedure is as follows:
Vehicles with manual transmission
1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
5. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position.
NOTE
● For Clear Tec FFV models, if the fuel tank is filled with
Bio ethanol E 85 and the ambient temperature is approximately -15°C or lower, the engine may be difficult to start.
If this occurs, add unleaded petrol 95 RON or higher to
the fuel tank to increase the percentage of petrol.
4
4-17
Starting and driving
6. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position and make certain that all warning lamps are functioning properly before
starting the engine.
7. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal, and release it when the
engine starts.
NOTE
4
● A ticking noise may be heard after starting the engine.
This is not an abnormal condition. The noise will disappear after a short time of engine running.
If the ticking noise continues after the engine is warmed
up, we recommend you to have your vehicle checked.
● If the engine won’t start, depress the accelerator pedal
fully while cranking the engine. Once the engine starts,
release the accelerator pedal.
!
CAUTION
● When starting the engine, make sure you depress
the brake pedal. If you start the engine with the
accelerator pedal depressed, move your foot to the
brake pedal as soon as the engine has started.
4-18
Vehicles with automated manual transmission
1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position and make certain that all warning lamps are functioning properly.
5. Place the allshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) position and
confirm that “N” is shown by the multi-information display. Refer to “Moving the allshift lever” on page 4-30.
Starting and driving
6. Turn the ignition key to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal, and release it when the
engine starts.
NOTE
● For safety, the vehicle is designed such that the engine
will not start unless the allshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) position. Place the allshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
position before starting the engine.
● If you turn the ignition key to the “START” position when
the gearshift is not in the “N” (Neutral) position, the
multi-information display will behave as follows to indicate that the engine will not start.
• Gearshift in “S” (Stand by) position: An “A” or “1” will
be shown. Or “0” will flash.
• Gearshift in “R” (Reverse) position: An “R” will be
shown. Or “0” will flash.
Confirm that “N” is shown by the multi-information display.
● If the engine won’t start, depress the accelerator pedal
while cranking the engine. Once the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal.
!
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system*
E00627400022
The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system automatically stops and
restarts the engine without operating the ignition switch when
the vehicle is stopped, such as at a traffic light or in a traffic
jam, to reduce exhaust gases and increase fuel efficiency.
!
CAUTION
● If the vehicle will be stopped for a long time or if you
leave the vehicle unattended, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Automatically stopping the engine
E00627500010
The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
You can deactivate the system by pressing the “Auto Stop &
Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-24.
CAUTION
● When starting the engine, make sure you depress
the brake pedal. If you start the engine with the
accelerator pedal depressed, move your foot to the
brake pedal as soon as the engine has started.
4-19
4
Starting and driving
1. Stop the vehicle.
While depressing the brake pedal, fully depress the clutch
pedal and place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
position.
2. Release the clutch pedal. The “ ” indicator lamp in the
meter will illuminate and the engine will stop automatically.
4
NOTE
● Under normal conditions, the “ ” indicator lamp will
also illuminate for a few seconds when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
● The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal
effort will increase when the engine is stopped automatically.
If the vehicle is moving, press down the brake pedal
harder than usual.
4-20
Starting and driving
!
CAUTION
● Observe the following precautions when the engine
is stopped automatically. Otherwise, an unexpected
accident might occur when the engine restarts automatically.
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal to race the
engine while the vehicle is stopped (regardless of
whether the engine is running or stopped).
Otherwise, an unexpected accident might occur
when the engine restarts automatically.
• Do not leave the driver’s seat or open the bonnet.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened or if the bonnet is opened, the “ ” indicator lamp will blink to
inform the driver. If this occurs, the engine will not
restart automatically even if the clutch pedal is
depressed, the seat belt is refastened, and the bonnet is closed. While depressing the brake pedal,
fully depress the clutch pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
For details, refer to “Starting the engine” on page
4-17.
!
CAUTION
• Do not move the gearshift lever to a position other
than the “N” (Neutral) position.
If the gearshift lever is moved to a position other
than the “N” (Neutral) position, the “ ” indicator
lamp blinks and the buzzer sounds.
If the gearshift lever is returned to the “N” (Neutral) position, the lamp stops blinking and the
buzzer stops sounding. The engine will not restart
if the gearshift lever is in a position other than the
“N” (Neutral) position.
4
4-21
Starting and driving
NOTE
4
● In the following cases, the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system will not operate and the engine will not stop automatically even if the vehicle is stopped.
• Driver’s seat belt is not fastened
• Bonnet is open
• After the engine restarts automatically, the vehicle speed
has not exceeded approximately 5 km/h (3 mph)
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low because the brake
pedal is depressed repeatedly or depressed harder than
usual
• After the ignition switch is turned from the “LOCK”
position to the “START” position, approximately 3 minutes or more have not elapsed
• After the ignition switch is turned from the “ON” position to the “START” position, approximately 30 seconds
or more have not elapsed.
• After the engine restarts automatically, the vehicle stops
again within 10 seconds
• Engine coolant temperature is low
• Ambient temperature is lower than approximately 3°C
• Air conditioner is operating and passenger compartment
has not sufficiently cooled (for vehicles with automatic
air conditioning)
• Mode selection dial is set to the demister position (for
vehicles with automatic air conditioning)
Refer to “For quick demisting” on page 5-20.
• Electric power consumption is high, such as when the
rear window demister or other electrical components are
operating or the blower speed is set to a high setting
• Battery voltage or battery performance is low
4-22
• Check engine warning lamp is illuminated or the “
indicator lamp is blinking
”
[For vehicles with automatic air conditioning]
● If the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system operates while the
air conditioner is operating, both the engine and the air
conditioning compressor will stop. Therefore, only the
blower will operate.
● If air is flowing from the demister and the engine is
stopped automatically, it is recommended to set the mode
selection dial to the Demister/Face or Foot/Demister position.
Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 5-3, 520.
● If the air conditioner is operating, set the temperature control dial to 22°C or higher to lengthen the time that the
engine is stopped automatically.
● If the air conditioner is operating when the ambient temperature is high, such as during the summer, change the
air selection from outside air to recirculated air to
lengthen the time that the engine is stopped automatically.
Starting and driving
Automatically restarting the engine
E00627600011
Depress the clutch pedal while the gearshift lever is in the “N”
(Neutral) position. The “ ” indicator lamp in the meter turns
off and the engine restarts automatically.
NOTE
● If the engine does not restart automatically or if the engine
stalls, the oil pressure warning lamp, charge warning
lamp, and check engine warning lamp will illuminate.
If this occurs, the engine will not restart even if the clutch
pedal is depressed again. While depressing the brake
pedal, fully depress the clutch pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
For details, refer to “Starting the engine” on page 4-17.
!
CAUTION
● In the following cases, the engine will restart automatically even if the engine was stopped by the Auto
Stop & Go (AS&G) system. Pay careful attention,
otherwise an unexpected accident might occur when
the engine restarts.
• Vehicle speed is 3 km/h (2 mph) or higher when
coasting down a slope
• Brake booster vacuum pressure is low because the
brake pedal is depressed repeatedly or depressed
harder than usual
• Steering wheel is turned
• Engine coolant temperature is low
• When the air conditioner is ON, the passenger
compartment temperature rises and the air conditioning compressor operates to lower the temperature (for vehicles with automatic air conditioning)
• Mode selection dial is set to the demister position
(for vehicles with automatic air conditioning)
Refer to “For quick demisting” on page 5-20
• Electric power consumption is high, such as when
the rear window demister or other electrical components are operating or the blower speed is set to
a high setting
NOTE
● If the “Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch is pressed
to deactivate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system while
the engine is stopped automatically, the engine will not
restart automatically even if the clutch pedal is depressed.
4-23
4
Starting and driving
To deactivate
NOTE
E00627700012
The Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is automatically activated when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
You can deactivate the system by pressing the “Auto Stop &
Go (AS&G) OFF” switch.
When the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system is deactivated, the
“ ” indicator lamp will be illuminated in the meter.
To reactivate the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system, press the
“Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) OFF” switch; the indicator lamp
will turn off.
4
4-24
● This lamp will also illuminate for a few seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.
If the
indicator lamp blinks while driving
E00627800026
If the “ ” indicator lamp blinks, the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G)
system is malfunctioning and will not operate.
We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
Starting and driving
Manual transmission
NOTE
E00602000232
The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever knob. Be sure
to always fully depress the clutch pedal before attempting to
shift the lever.
● If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the clutch pedal again;
the shift will then be easier to make.
● To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the gearshift
lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, and then shift it into
reverse.
● To avoid grinding noises when shifting into reverse, wait
approximately 3 seconds with the clutch depressed when
the vehicle is stationary.
4
!
CAUTION
● Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse while
the vehicle is moving forward; doing so will damage
the transmission.
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving as this will cause premature clutch wear or damage.
4-25
Starting and driving
Changing gears
Possible driving speed
E00610600178
Always use care to change the gear with the vehicle speed
matched to the engine speed. Proper shifting will improve fuel
economy and prolong engine life.
Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may cause excessive
engine speed (the tachometer needle into the red zone) and
damage the engine.
E00610801005
Speed limit
Shift point
NOTE
● The gearshift indicator (if so equipped) shows recommended gearshift points for fuel-efficient driving. It
shows a “ ” when an upshift is recommended, and it
shows a “ ” when a downshift is recommended.
4
or
4-26
1100 models
1300 models
Except
Except
for
for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
1st gear
45 km/h
(28 mph)
50 km/h
(31 mph)
45 km/h
(28 mph)
50 km/h
(31 mph)
2nd gear
80 km/h
(50 mph)
85 km/h
(53 mph)
85 km/h
(53 mph)
90 km/h
(56 mph)
3rd gear
120 km/h
(75 mph)
130 km/h
(81 mph)
130 km/h
(81 mph)
140 km/h
(87 mph)
4th gear
165 km/h 175 km/h 170 km/h 185 km/h
(100 mph) (110 mph) (110 mph) (110 mph)
Starting and driving
Speed limit
Shift point
1500 models
Except for vehicles
with turbocharger
Vehicles with
turbocharger
1st gear
45 km/h (28 mph)
50 km/h (31 mph)
2nd gear
85 km/h (53 mph)
95 km/h (59 mph)
3rd gear
130 km/h (81 mph)
135 km/h (84 mph)
4th gear
170 km/h (110 mph)
180 km/h (110 mph)
5th gear is an overdrive ratio and its use reduces engine speed
below that of the 4th gear. Use 5th gear whenever vehicle
speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.
4
4-27
Starting and driving
Automated manual transmission
E00612500038
An automated manual transmission is a transmission in which
operation of the clutch and shifting of gears are performed
automatically under electronic control. The transmission has 6
forward gears and 1 reverse gear.
It is possible to choose between an automatic mode and a manual mode by using the allshift lever (A).
● Manual mode: The driver effects gearshifts using the
allshift lever, and the clutch is controlled automatically.
● Automatic mode: Gearshifts take place automatically in
accordance with the vehicle speed, and the clutch is controlled automatically.
The currently selected shift position, manual mode or automatic mode is indicated on the multi-information display (B).
4
4-28
Starting and driving
Allshift lever position and multi-information display
E00612600055
Multi-information display
Allshift lever position
Description
N (Neutral)
Power is not transmitted. This is the only position where the engine can be
started.
R (Reverse)
This position is used for reversing.
automatic
mode*
S (Stand by)
through
or
manual
mode*
Gearshifts are performed automatically at all vehicle speeds (from a standing start right up to highway speeds).
+ (UP
SHIFT)
4
Shift up
Gearshifts can be performed from 1st gear to 6th
gear using the allshift lever.
- (DOWN
Shift down
SHIFT)
S (Stand by)
The indicator shows the recommended gearshift points for fuel-efficient
driving.
N (Neutral)
or
R (Reverse)
or
S (Stand by)
If you do not depress the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from
the “N” (Neutral) position to the “S” (Stand by) position (or vice versa) or
from the “N” (Neutral) position to the “R” (Reverse) position (or vice
versa), the indicator will show that a gearshift has not taken place.
*: When the allshift lever is moved from the “S” (Stand by) position to the “A” (Auto) position, the transmission switches to the automatic mode or to the manual mode.
4-29
Starting and driving
Moving the allshift lever
E00612700014
The allshift lever is operated as follows;
Moving the allshift lever between “N”(Neutral) position
↔ “S”(Stand by) position, “N”(Neutral) position ↔
“R”(Reverse) position
,
,
or
E00613700053
4
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, place the allshift lever
in the “S” (Stand by) position, “R” (Reverse) position or
“N” (Neutral) position.
The multi-information display will be shown as follows;
• “S” (Stand by) position: “A” (automatic mode) or “1”
(manual mode)
• “R” (Reverse) position: “R”
• “N” (Neutral) position: “N”
NOTE
● You must have the brake pedal firmly depressed when
moving the allshift lever. If you only move the allshift
lever (without depressing the brake pedal), a gearshift will
not take place. At this time, a “0” will appear on the multiinformation display to show that a gearshift has not taken
place. Depress the brake pedal to cause the gearshift to
take place. The multi-information display will show the
selected gearshift position.
4-30
Starting and driving
Choosing between automatic mode and manual mode
E00612800057
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, choosing
between automatic mode and manual mode is allowed.
Whenever the allshift lever is placed in the “A” (Auto) position
from the “S” (Stand by) position, the transmission switches
from the automatic mode to the manual mode or vice versa and
the currently selected mode is indicated on the multi-information display. In automatic mode, “A” is shown, and in manual
mode, “1 through 6” is shown on the multi-information display.
NOTE
● When you turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, the mode selection used until that
moment will be erased. When you subsequently turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position, a mode will automatically be selected as a manual mode.
or
4
through
4-31
Starting and driving
Performing gearshifts (manual mode)
E00612900061
1. Choose the manual mode using the allshift lever. Refer to
“Choosing between automatic mode and manual mode”
on page 4-31.
2. While holding the accelerator pedal steady, move the
allshift lever in the + (UP SHIFT) or - (DOWN SHIFT)
direction. The currently selected gear is indicated on the
multi-information display.
through
4
+ (UP SHIFT)
Push the allshift lever forward once to shift up one gear.
- (DOWN SHIFT)
Push the allshift lever backward once to shift down one
gear.
!
NOTE
UP SHIFT
DOWN SHIFT
4-32
CAUTION
● To maintain good running performance, the transmission may refuse to perform an upshift when the
allshift lever is moved to the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle speeds. Also, to prevent overrevving of the engine, the lever is moved to the “(SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain vehicle speeds.
● Hard engine braking and sharp acceleration can
cause the tyres to slip on the road surface. Perform
downshifts in a manner appropriate for the current
road conditions and vehicle speed.
● During vehicle operation, the transmission automatically
shifts down when the vehicle speed decreases. It selects
1st gear just before the vehicle reaches a standstill.
Starting and driving
How to drive a vehicle with automated
manual transmission
E00613000014
Starting from a standstill
E00613100060
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot.
2. Place the allshift lever in the “S” (Stand by) position if
you wish to drive forward and in the “R” (Reverse) position if you wish to reverse. Confirm that either an “A”, a
“1” or an “R” is shown by the multi-information display.
,
or
NOTE
● If the brake pedal is not depressed when the allshift lever
is moved, a gearshift will not take place. At this time, the
driver is notified by a “0” on the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal to cause the gearshift to take
place. The multi-information display will show the
selected gearshift position.
3. Choose between the automatic mode and manual mode
with the allshift lever. Refer to “Choosing between automatic mode and manual mode” on page 4-31.
4. Confirm safety around the vehicle, then release the parking brake.
5. Start moving by gradually easing off the brake pedal
while gently applying pressure to the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
● When driving away on a slippery road, push the allshift
lever forward into the “+ (UP SHIFT)” position from the
“S” (Stand by) position. This causes the transmission to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving
away on a slippery road. At this time, the multi-information display shows “2”. Push the allshift lever to the “(DOWN SHIFT)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.
4-33
4
Starting and driving
Starting from a standstill on an uphill slope
1. To prevent unwanted movement of the vehicle, release the
brake pedal while leaving the parking brake applied.
2. Gently apply pressure to the accelerator pedal. As you feel
the vehicle starts to move, release the parking brake and
pull away.
!
CAUTION
● When pulling away from a standstill on an uphill
slope, be sure to start with the parking brake
applied. If you released the brake pedal without the
parking brake applied, therefore, the vehicle would
roll backward, possibly causing an accident.
Driving
E00613200058
!
WARNING
● Never move the allshift lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving. A serious accident
could occur since you will lose engine braking.
Automatic mode
Drive with the allshift lever in the “S” (Stand by) position.
Gearshifts will take place automatically in accordance with the
vehicle speed.
Manual mode
Select appropriate gears using the allshift lever. Always select
the gear that suits the speed at which you wish to drive.
4
4-34
Starting and driving
NOTE
● When “ ” and the allshift lever position display are
flashing alternately, an upshift is recommended. When
“ ” and the allshift lever position display are flashing
alternately, a downshift is recommended.
or
Driving downhill
When driving downhill, shift down to an appropriate gear in
order to use engine braking.
On long downward slopes, repeated use of the brake pedal can
cause the brake system to overheat, resulting in reduced braking performance. Be sure to use engine braking as well as the
brake system.
!
WARNING
● Hard engine braking can cause the tyres to slip on
the road surface, possibly leading to a serious accident.
4
through
Passing acceleration
·Automatic mode: Depress the acceleration pedal to the floor.
·Manual mode: Use the allshift lever to shift to an appropriate
gear before depressing the accelerator pedal to
accelerate.
4-35
Starting and driving
Waiting
E00613300059
1. With the allshift lever in the “S” (Stand by) position,
firmly depress the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, apply the parking brake.
!
4
CAUTION
● On an uphill slope, the transmission’s creep effect
may not stop the vehicle from rolling backward if
the brakes are not applied. There is no creep effect
while 2nd gear is selected. When stopping, be sure to
depress the brake pedal and securely apply the
parking brake.
● Do not attempt to hold the vehicle in place on an
uphill road in 1st gear by depressing on the accelerator pedal. The transmission could malfunction if you
do.
3. When you are stationary for a long period (for example,
when stuck in a traffic jam), place the allshift lever in the
“N” (Neutral) position.
!
CAUTION
● Continue to pay attention to the vehicle while stationary. If you allow your attention to wander and
the allshift lever is in any position other than “N”
(Neutral), the vehicle could move suddenly and
unexpectedly.
4-36
4. When you are ready to start moving again, first confirm
that the allshift lever is in the “S” (Stand by) position or
“R” (Reverse) position and that an “A”, “1”, or “R” is
shown on the multi-information display.
NOTE
● During vehicle operation, the transmission automatically
shifts down when the vehicle speed decreases. It selects
1st gear just before the vehicle reaches a standstill.
!
CAUTION
● The actions described below cause rapid clutch wear
and can cause clutch damage. Do not perform them.
• Depressing the brake and accelerator pedals at the
same time.
• Holding the vehicle in place on an uphill road by
depressing the accelerator pedal (and not depressing the brake pedal) with 1st gear selected.
Starting and driving
Parking
4. Stop the engine.
E00613400034
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, securely apply the
parking brake.
3. Move the allshift lever into the “S” (Stand by) position
when parking on an uphill grade, into the “R” (Reverse)
position when parking on a downhill grade. And confirm
that there is an “A”, “1” or “R” in the multi-information
display.
,
or
!
CAUTION
● When leaving the vehicle, be sure to stop the engine
and remove the key from the ignition switch. If you
were to leave the engine running with the allshift
lever in the “S” (Stand by) or “R” position, the
transmission’s creep effect could cause the vehicle to
move by itself. Also, the vehicle could suddenly
move if you accidentally pressed the accelerator
pedal when getting back in the vehicle.
NOTE
● Sit in the correct position for driving even if you plan to
move just a short distance. Make sure you are able to
depress the brake pedal and accelerator pedal properly.
● Reversing involves twisting to look rearward in a position
that makes operation of the pedals more difficult. Make
sure you are able to depress the brake pedal.
4-37
4
Starting and driving
Braking
E00607000947
All parts of the brake system are critical for safety. We recommend that you have the vehicle checked at regular intervals
according to the service booklet.
!
CAUTION
● Avoid driving habits that cause heavy braking and
never “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
brake pedal while driving.
This causes brake overheating and fade.
Brake system
4
The service brake is divided into two brake circuits so that if
one brake circuit fails, the other one is available to stop the
vehicle. In this situation, even if the brake pedal moves down
to the very end of its possible stroke, keep it pressed down
hard; stop driving as soon as possible and have the brake system repaired.
Power brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking
force with less brake pedal effort.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the
power assist is not being used.
If the power assist is not being used, the effort needed to press
the brake pedal is greater.
If you should loose the power assist for some reason, the
brakes will still work.
4-38
If the power brake unit or either of the two brake hydraulic systems stops working properly, the rest of the brake system will
still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly.
You will know this has happened if you find you need to press
the brake down further or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning lamp comes on.
!
WARNING
● Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. Keep the
engine running whenever your vehicle is in motion.
If you turn off the engine while driving, the power
brake booster will stop working and your brakes
will not work as well.
● If the power assist is lost or if either brake hydraulic
system stops working properly, have your vehicle
checked immediately.
Warning lamp
The brake warning lamp will illuminate to indicate a fault in
the braking system. Read “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-26.
When brakes are wet
Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, especially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.
A film of water can be formed on the brake discs or brake
drums and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain
or through large puddles, or after the vehicle has been washed.
If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while
lightly depressing the brake pedal.
Starting and driving
Emergency stop signal system
When driving downhill
It is important to take advantage of engine braking by shifting
to a lower shift position while driving on steep downhill roads
in order to prevent the brakes from overheating.
!
WARNING
● Do not leave any objects near the brake pedal or let
a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the
full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated
freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is
securely held in place.
Brake pads and linings
● With new brake pads or linings, avoid where possible sudden full application of the brakes for the first 200 km (120
miles) of driving.
● The disc brakes are fitted with a warning device which
emits a shrieking metallic sound while braking if the
brake pads have reached their limit.
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced.
!
E00626000021
This is a device that reduces the possibility of rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert vehicles approaching from behind during
sudden braking. When the emergency stop signal system operates, the hazard warning indicator lamp in the instrument cluster blinks rapidly at the same time.
!
CAUTION
● If the ABS warning lamp or TCL/ASC indicator
lamp is illuminated, the emergency stop signal system may not operate. Refer to “ABS warning lamp”
on page 4-43.
Refer to “Traction control system (TCL)/Active stability control system (ASC) indicator lamp” on page
4-49.
WARNING
● Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to
stop, and can cause an accident.
4-39
4
Starting and driving
Brake assist system
NOTE
4
● [Activating condition for the emergency stop signal
system]
It activates when all of the following conditions are met.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 55 km/h (34 mph) or
higher.
• The brake pedal has been depressed, and the system
judges that it was sudden braking from the vehicle
deceleration and the operating condition of the anti-lock
brake system (ABS).
[Deactivating condition for the emergency stop signal
system]
It deactivates when one of the following conditions is met.
• The brake pedal is released.
• The hazard warning flasher switch is pressed.
• The system judges that it was not sudden braking from
the vehicle deceleration and the operating condition of
the anti-lock brake system (ABS).
4-40
E00627000031
The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly when it is necessary to do so
(such as in emergency stop situations) and provides greater
braking force.
If the brake pedal is depressed either suddenly or with more
force than usual, the brakes will be applied with more force
than usual.
!
CAUTION
● The brake assist system is not a device designed to
exercise braking force greater than its capacity. It is
designed to provide assistance by giving additional
power when depressing the brake pedal. Make sure
to always keep a sufficient distance between vehicles
in front of you without relying too much on the
brake assist system.
Starting and driving
NOTE
● The brake assist system will not operate if the brake pedal
is not depressed either suddenly or with more force than
usual.
● When the brake assist system is in use, you may feel as if
the depressed brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
motions in conjunction with the sound of the ABS operation, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate.
This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
firmly depress the brake pedal.
● You may hear the sound of the device operating when the
brake pedal is depressed either suddenly or with more
force than usual both while driving and when stopped.
This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
E00607100791
Environmental conditions can have an effect on braking. During sudden braking when there is snow, ice, oil, water etc. on
the road surface, a skid may occur. In this situation, steering
control and braking effectiveness is reduced and the stopping
distance is increased. The vehicle may also go into an uncontrolled spin.
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking during braking, thus maintaining directional stability, ensuring controllability and providing optimum braking force.
Driving hints
● When using the anti-lock brake system (sudden braking),
steering is slightly different from normal driving conditions. Use the steering wheel carefully.
● Always maintain the same distance from the vehicle in
front of you as you would for a vehicle not equipped with
ABS.
Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following
cases:
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.
• Driving with tyre chains installed.
• Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has
other differences in surface height.
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driving surfaces.
4-41
4
Starting and driving
● Operation of ABS is not restricted to situations where
brakes are applied suddenly. This system may also operate
to prevent wheel lock when you are driving over manholes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicle is driven over
steps or level differences in the road, road markings, or
other surfaces which are difficult for the wheels to grip.
● When the ABS is activated, you may feel the brake pedal
pulsating and hear a characteristic noise. Also at this time,
it may feel as if the pedal attempts to resist being
depressed.
In this situation, to let the ABS work for you, just hold
the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the
brake. This will result in reduced braking performance.
4
4-42
!
CAUTION
● Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle. It cannot for
instance avoid accidents that may result from excessive speed on bends or following another vehicle too
closely or aquaplaning. It should remain the driver’s
task to observe safety precautions to judge speeds
and brake applications correctly in such conditions.
● Be sure to use tyres of the same type and size on 4
wheels.
If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may not function properly.
● Never install a limited slip differential, which is not
MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts, as the ABS
may not function properly.
We recommend to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Starting and driving
ABS warning lamp
If the warning lamp illuminates while driving
E00607200835
The ABS warning lamp comes on and a buzzer sounds in the
event of a malfunction in the anti-lock brake system. It will
also come on as a self-check for a few seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and the lamp goes
off after a few seconds. Always make sure that the lamp goes
out before beginning to drive.
!
CAUTION
● If the warning lamp stays on or does not illuminate
when you start the vehicle, it indicates that the ABS
is not functioning and that only the standard brake
system is in operation. (In this condition the standard hydraulic brake system will still function.) We
recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
E00607301035
If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates
● Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Restart the engine and check to see whether the lamp goes
out after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driving, there is no problem.
However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it lights up
again when the vehicle is driven, we recommend you to
consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
● The ABS warning lamp can illuminate if the battery voltage is insufficient when the engine is started. In this case,
it does not indicate an ABS fault.
Charge the battery by allowing the engine to idle for a
while.
If the battery has been charged but the ABS warning lamp
continues to illuminate or illuminates intermittently, we
recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp
illuminate at the same time
● The brake force distribution function may not work, so
hard braking could make the vehicle unstable.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
4-43
4
Starting and driving
NOTE
● Immediately after the vehicle starts moving after engine
start up, a whining sound of a motor will be heard from
the engine compartment. If the brake pedal is depressed at
that moment, a brake pedal pulsating is felt.
This whining sound and pulsation are due to the self-diagnosis operation of the ABS and does not indicate a malfunction.
● After driving on snowy roads, remove any snow and ice
which may have become adhered to the wheel areas.
When doing this, be careful not to damage the wheel
speed sensors (A) and cables located at each wheel on
vehicles equipped with an ABS.
4
4-44
Starting and driving
● The ABS becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6
mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
Electric power steering system
E00607400026
The electric power steering system reduces the effort required
to turn the steering wheel. It operates while the engine is running.
!
CAUTION
● Do not stop the engine while driving. With the
engine stopped, the steering action would become
extremely heavy and an unexpected accident might
occur.
NOTE
● If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel fully to either
side (while parking, for example), a protective function
that prevents the system from overheating will be activated, making the steering action gradually heavier. In this
event, turn the steering wheel as little as possible for a
while. When the system’s temperature decreases, the
steering action will return to normal.
● If you turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary with its headlamps on, the headlamps may grow dim.
This phenomenon does not indicate a fault. The headlamps will return to their original brightness after a short
while.
4-45
4
Starting and driving
Electric power steering warning lamp
If the warning lamp illuminates while driving
E00612400024
E00613600049
The electric power steering warning lamp comes on and a
buzzer sounds in the event of a control abnormality in the electric power steering system.
When the system is normal, the electric power steering warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after a few seconds.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position. If the electric power steering warning lamp comes on then goes off
after a few seconds, there is no abnormality. However, if
the lamp does not go off, or if it comes on again when the
vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have the power
steering inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
4
!
CAUTION
● If the electric power steering warning lamp comes
on while the vehicle is moving, the steering action
may become heavy.
4-46
Starting and driving
Traction control system (TCL)/
Active stability control system (ASC)*
E00611700033
The traction control system (TCL)/active stability control system (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system,
traction control system and active stability control system to
help maintain the vehicle’s control and traction. Please read
this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock brake
system, traction control system and active stability control system.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) → P. 4-41
Traction control system (TCL) → P. 4-48
Active stability control system (ASC) → P. 4-48
!
CAUTION
● Do not over-rely on the traction control system
(TCL)/active stability control system (ASC). Even
when the traction control system (TCL)/active stability control system (ASC) is operating, there are
limits to the system and its ability to maintain control and traction. Reckless driving may lead to accidents. Always drive carefully, taking account of the
road conditions.
● Be sure to use the same specified type and size of
tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, there is a possibility
that the traction control system (TCL)/active stability control system (ASC) will not work properly.
NOTE
● Immediately after the vehicle starts moving after engine
start up, a whining sound of a motor will be heard from
the engine compartment. If the brake pedal is depressed at
that moment, a brake pedal pulsating is felt.
This whining sound and pulsation are due to the self-diagnosis operation of the traction control system (TCL)/
active stability control system (ASC) and does not indicate a malfunction.
● Some vibration will be felt in the vehicle body and a
whining sound of a motor will be heard from the engine
compartment when the traction control system (TCL)/
active stability control system (ASC) functions. This is a
normal result of the traction control system (TCL)/active
stability control system (ASC) operation, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
● The traction control system (TCL)/active stability control
system (ASC) does not operate while the ABS warning
lamp is illuminated.
4-47
4
Starting and driving
Traction control system (TCL)
Active stability control system (ASC)
E00611800021
E00612000020
On slippery surfaces, the traction control system (TCL) prevents the drive wheels from excessive spinning, thus helping
the vehicle to start moving from a stop. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle
turns at accelerated speeds.
The active stability control system (ASC) is designed to help
maintain the vehicle’s control in slippery conditions, or during
rapid steering manoeuvres. It works by controlling the engine
output and the brake on each wheel.
!
CAUTION
● When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy road, be
sure to install snow tyres and drive the vehicle at
moderate speeds.
NOTE
4
● When moving out of mud or fresh snow, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to
increase.
4-48
NOTE
● The active stability control system (ASC) functions at
speeds of approximately 10 km/h or higher.
Starting and driving
Traction control system (TCL)/Active stability
control system (ASC) indicator lamp
E00612100119
The traction control system (TCL) and active stability control
system (ASC) share the same indicator lamp.
The indicator lamp should illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, and should go off after a few
seconds. Always make sure that the lamp goes off before
begining to drive.
If the indicator lamp stays on or does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, we recommend
you to consult a MITSUISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
indicator lamp blinks when the traction control system
(TCL) or active stability control system (ASC) is operating.
!
CAUTION
● When
indicator lamp blinks, the traction control
system (TCL) or active stability control system
(ASC) is operating, which means that the road is
slippery or that your vehicle’s wheels are slipping
excessively. If this happens, drive slower with less
accelerator input.
● If a malfunction occurs in the device, the
indicator lamp will continuously illuminate. Park your
vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine. Then,
start the engine again and check whether the
indicator lamp goes out.
If the
indicator lamp remains on even after your
vehicle is driven a short distance after starting the
engine, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
4-49
4
Starting and driving
!
● If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position and only the front wheels or only the
rear wheels raised off the ground, the traction control system (TCL) may operate, resulting in an accident. When towing the vehicle with the front wheels
raised, keep the ignition switch in the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position. When towing the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, keep the ignition switch in the
“ACC” position.
Refer to “Towing” on page 6-34.
4
Cruise control*
CAUTION
E00609100623
Cruise control is an automatic speed control system that keeps
a set speed. It can be activated at about 40 km/h or more.
!
CAUTION
● When you do not wish to drive at a set speed, turn
off the cruise control for safety.
● Do not use cruise control when driving conditions
will not allow you to stay at the same speed, such as
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep downhill
slope.
● On vehicles with M/T, do not move the gearshift
lever to the gNh (Neutral) position while driving at a
set speed without depressing the clutch pedal. The
engine will run too fast and might be damaged.
NOTE
● Cruise control may not be able to keep your speed on
uphills or downhills.
● Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. You may use
the accelerator pedal if you want to stay at your set speed.
● Your speed may increase to more than the set speed on a
steep downhill. You have to use the brake to control your
speed. As a result, the set speed driving is deactivated.
4-50
Starting and driving
Cruise control switches
NOTE
● When operating the cruise control switches, press the
cruise control switches correctly. The set speed driving
may be deactivated automatically if two or more switches
of the cruise control are pressed at the same time.
4
A- “ON OFF” switch
Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- “COAST SET” switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired speed.
C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to the original set
speed.
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
4-51
Starting and driving
To activate the cruise control
NOTE
E00609300700
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” position, press the
“ON OFF” switch (A) to turn on the cruise control. The
“CRUISE” indicator lamp in the meter cluster will come
on.
4
4-52
● If the cruise control is on when the ignition switch is
turned to “LOCK” or “ACC” position, cruise control will
be on automatically the next time you start the engine.
The “CRUISE” indicator lamp will also be on.
● If the battery voltage is insufficient, the memory data for
the cruise control may be erased.
As a result, the “CRUISE” indicator lamp may not come
on when you restart the engine.
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch once again to
turn on the cruise control.
Starting and driving
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired speed, then press
and release the “COAST SET” switch (B) when the
“CRUISE” indicator lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will
then maintain the desired speed.
To increase the set speed
E00609400479
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
“ACC RES” switch
Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) while driving at the
set speed, and your speed will then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your
new cruising speed is now set.
4
NOTE
● When you release the “COAST SET” switch, the vehicle
speed will be set.
To increase your speed in small amounts, press the “ACC
RES” switch for less than about 1 second and release it.
Each time you press the “ACC RES” switch, your vehicle will
go about 1.6 km/h faster.
4-53
Starting and driving
Accelerator pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator pedal to
reach your desired speed and then press the “COAST SET”
switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
To decrease the set speed
E00609500409
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
“COAST SET” switch
Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) while driving at
the set speed, and your speed will slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release the switch. Your
new cruising speed is now set.
4
To slow down your speed in small amounts, press the “COAST
SET” switch for less than about 1 second and release it.
Each time you press the “COAST SET” switch, your vehicle
will slow down by about 1.6 km/h.
4-54
Starting and driving
Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, which disengages the cruise control, then press the “COAST SET”
switch (B) and release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
To temporarily increase or decrease the speed
E00609600149
To temporarily increase the speed
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When
you release the pedal, you will return to your set speed.
4
NOTE
● In some driving conditions, the set driving speed may be
deactivated. If this happens, refer to “To activate” on page
4-52 and repeat the speed setting procedure.
4-55
Starting and driving
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To return to the
previously set speed, press the “ACC RES” switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 4-57.
To deactivate the cruise control
E00609700889
The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:
● Press the “ON OFF” switch (A) (Cruise control will be
turned off.)
● Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
● Depress the brake pedal.
4
The set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any of the
following ways.
● When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehicles with manual transmission).
● When your speed slows to about 15 km/h (9 mph) or more
below the set speed because of a hill, etc. (on vehicles
with manual transmission).
● When your speed slows to about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
less.
4-56
Starting and driving
● When the active stability control system (ASC) starts
operating. (if so equipped)
Refer to “Traction control system (TCL)/Active stability
control system (ASC)” on page 4-48.
!
WARNING
To resume the set speed
E00609800457
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condition
described in “To deactivate” on page 4-56, you can resume the
previously set speed by pressing the “ACC RES” switch (C)
while driving at a speed of about 40 km/h or higher.
● On vehicles with AMT, although the set speed driving will be deactivated when shifting to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the allshift lever
to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and could cause
a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated as follows:
● When the engine speed rises and approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer
dial).
!
4
CAUTION
● When the set speed driving is deactivated automatically in any situation other than those listed above,
there may be a system malfunction.
Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn off the cruise
control and have your vehicle inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised Service Point.
Under either of the following conditions, however, using the
switch does not allow you to resume the previously set speed.
In these situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
● The “ON OFF” switch is pressed.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.
● “CRUISE” indicator lamp is turned OFF.
4-57
Starting and driving
Cargo loads
Trailer towing
E00609901240
Cargo loads precautions
!
4
CAUTION
● When loading luggage, be careful to the following.
• Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
• Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not to be unbalanced in weight of a load.
• Do not place cargo or luggage on the instrument
panel.
Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage on the front
passenger’s seat or the rear seats.
Having the driver’s vision blocked, and your cargo
being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have
to brake can cause a serious accident or injury.
4-58
E00610000329
In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, have a trailer towing
device that meets all relevant regulations in your area, mounted
consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer may differ
from country to country. You are advised to obey the regulations in each area.
!
CAUTION
● Danger of Accident!
A towing bar should be fitted according to
MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
NOTE
● If you are going to tow a trailer, pay careful attention to
the following points.
Starting and driving
Maximum towable weight with brake and
maximum trailer-nose weight
Towing bar mounting specifications
See the following table for fixing points (A) for the towing bar.
Never exceed the maximum towable weight with brake and the
maximum trailer-nose weight as listed in the specifications.
(Refer to page 9-9.)
If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than 1,000 m above
sea-level, reduce your weight by 10 % of the gross combination weight for every increase of 1,000 m above sea-level, as
the engine output is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric
pressure.
4
4-59
Starting and driving
3-door models
4
1
111 mm
16
435 mm
2
195 mm
17
470 mm
3
80 mm
18
506 mm
4
452 mm
19
458 mm
5
425 mm
20
442 mm
6
410 mm
21
193 mm
7
443 mm
22
10 mm
8
450 mm
23
222 mm
9
464 mm (unladen)
370 mm (laden)
24
111 mm
10
456 mm
25
435 mm
11
445 mm
26
470 mm
12
150 mm
27
504 mm
13
13 mm
28
118 mm
14
137 mm
29
82 mm
15
214 mm
Item 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8: at kerb weight
NOTE
● The value of item 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 is applicable to unladen
vehicles. This value can also be varied depending on the
tyre size, optional equipment and suspension conditions.
4-60
Starting and driving
5-door models
1
111 mm
15
278 mm
2
275 mm
16
436 mm
3
70 mm
17
470 mm
4
452 mm
18
504 mm
5
425 mm
19
458 mm
6
410 mm
20
442 mm
7
443 mm
21
193 mm
8
450 mm
22
9.5 mm
9
473 mm (unladen)
378 mm (laden)
23
222.5 mm
10
456 mm
24
183 mm
11
445 mm
25
436 mm
12
150 mm
26
470 mm
13
13 mm
27
504 mm
14
137 mm
4
Item 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8: at kerb weight
NOTE
● The value of item 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 is applicable to unladen
vehicles. This value can also be varied depending on the
tyre size, optional equipment and suspension conditions.
4-61
Starting and driving
Operating hints
4
● Do not let the clutch slip and do not increase the engine
speed more than necessary when starting.
● Be sure that the driving speed does not exceed the
100 km/h (62 mph) for trailer operation.
It is also recommended that you obey the local regulations
in case driving speed with a trailer is limited to less than
100 km/h (62 mph).
● To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, depress the
brake pedal lightly at first and then more strongly.
● To make full use of engine braking, change to a lower
gear before descending a slope.
● The body, brakes, clutch, and chassis will be under additional strain when towing a trailer.
● The heavier weight and higher rolling and air resistance
will increase fuel consumption.
4-62
For pleasant driving
Air outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Heater*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Automatic air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Important operation tips for the air conditioning. .5Air purifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with
CD player* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5To use the external audio input function . . . . . . . .5Steering wheel audio remote control switches*. . .5Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Handling compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Digital clock*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Interior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Storage spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Rear shelf panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5Coat hooks* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-
2
7
13
21
22
23
47
49
51
53
56
61
61
62
56
63
65
73
74
76
5
For pleasant driving
Air outlets
Air flow and direction adjustments
E00700100647
E00700200635
Push section (A) of the air outlet to open it.
Close the air outlets by pushing section (B).
Open
5
1- Central air outlets
2- Side air outlets
NOTE
● Do not place beverages on top of the instrument panel. If
they splash into the air outlets, they could damage the air
conditioning system.
5-2
Close
For pleasant driving
Change the direction of the airflow by turning the air outlet
itself.
Changing the mode selection
E00700301141
To change the position and amount of air flowing from the air
outlets, turn the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Mode selection
dial” on page 5-8, 5-15)
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the air outlets.
: Small amount of air from the air outlets
: Medium amount of air from the air outlets
: Large amount of air from the air outlets
NOTE
● On air conditioned vehicles, the cool air from the air outlets may appear as a mist.
This is due to moist air being suddenly cooled by the air
conditioning. This will clear after a few moments.
5
5-3
For pleasant driving
Face position
Foot/Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment.
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and
flows to the leg area.
5
* : Optional equipment
NOTE
● When the dial is set to position (1), air flows mostly to the
upper part of the passenger compartment. In position (2),
air flows mostly to the leg area.
5-4
For pleasant driving
Foot position
Foot/Demister position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the door windows.
5
* : Optional equipment
* : Optional equipment
NOTE
● With the dial set to position (1), air flows mostly to the leg
area. In position (2), air flows mostly to the windscreen.
5-5
For pleasant driving
Demister position
Demister/Face position
Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door windows.
Air flows to the windscreen, the door windows and the upper
part of the passenger compartment.
5
NOTE
● With the dial set to position (1), air flows mostly to the
windscreen. In position (2), air flows mostly to the upper
part of the passenger compartment.
5-6
For pleasant driving
Heater*
Blower speed selection dial
E00700500090
The heater can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
E00700600495
E00700700210
Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection
dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned
to the right.
When the blower speed selection dial is set to the “0” position,
all fan-driven airflow will stop.
5
ABCDE-
Temperature control dial
Blower speed selection dial
Rear window demister switch → P. 3-48
Mode selection dial
Air selection switch
5-7
For pleasant driving
Temperature control dial
Mode selection dial
E00700900300
E00701100325
The temperature control dial is used to adjust the air temperature.
Turn it clockwise to increase the temperature and anticlockwise to reduce the temperature.
To change the amount of air flowing from the air outlets, turn
the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 5-3.)
5
NOTE
● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the
engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with
the dial.
5-8
For pleasant driving
Air selection switch
E00701300662
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection
switch.
● Outside air {Indicator lamp (A) is OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.
● Recirculated air {Indicator lamp (A) is ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
!
CAUTION
● Normally, use the outside position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove
fog or frost from the windscreen.
If the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated
use the recirculation position. Switch to the outside
position periodically to increase ventilation so that
the windows do not become fogged up.
● Use of the recirculation position for extended time
may cause the windows to fog up.
NOTE
● Even if the recirculation position is being used before the
engine is stopped, outside air will automatically be
selected following the next engine startup.
5
5-9
For pleasant driving
Operating the heater system
Combination of unheated air and heated air
E00701800393
Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air
selection switch (A) to the outside position.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed.
E00702000389
Select the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part
of the passenger compartment. Select desired blower speed.
5
NOTE
● For maximum heat, set the blower speed at the 3rd position.
5-10
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm
air (depending upon temperature setting) flows to the upper
part of the passenger compartment.
For pleasant driving
Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
E00702100683
!
CAUTION
For ordinary demisting
Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door windows clear
of mist, and to keep leg area heating (when driving in rain or
snow).
● For safety, make sure you have a clear view through
all windows.
To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and door windows, use the mode selection dial. (Foot / Demister position or
Demister position)
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
2. Set the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration.
3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower
speed selection dial.
4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.
5-11
5
For pleasant driving
For quick demisting
Introduction of outside air
E00702200352
To introduce air into the vehicle during hot weather, set the air
selection switch (A) to the outside position and set the temperature control dial to the positions shown in the illustration. Be
sure to set the temperature control dial all the way to the left.
Select the desired blower speed.
5
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
3. Set the blower speed to the maximum blower speed position.
4. Set the temperature to the maximum temperature position.
NOTE
● To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side air
outlets towards the door windows.
5-12
NOTE
● Turn the mode selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise
and air will flow to the leg area and the windscreen.
For pleasant driving
Automatic air conditioning*
NOTE
E00702400022
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
● There is an interior air temperature sensor (A) inside the
vehicle.
Never place anything on top of the sensor, since doing so
will prevent it from functioning properly.
E00702501004
5
ABCDEF-
Temperature control dial
Air conditioning switch
Blower speed selection dial
Rear window demister switch → P. 3-48
Mode selection dial
Air selection switch
5-13
For pleasant driving
Blower speed selection dial
Temperature control dial
E00702800329
E00703000490
Select the blower speed by turning the blower speed selection
dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
The blower speed will gradually increase as the dial is turned
to the right.
When the blower speed selection dial is set to the “0” position,
all fan-driven airflow will stop.
The temperature control dial is used to adjust the cabin temperature. Turn it clockwise to increase the temperature and anticlockwise to reduce the temperature.
5
NOTE
● While the engine coolant temperature is low, the temperature of the air from the heater will be cool/cold until the
engine warms up, even if you have selected warm air with
the dial.
5-14
For pleasant driving
Mode selection dial
Air selection switch
E00703200447
To change the amount of air flowing from the air outlets, turn
the mode selection dial. (Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page 5-3.)
E00703400641
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection
switch.
● Outside air {Indicator lamp (A) is OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.
● Recirculated air {Indicator lamp (A) is ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
5
5-15
For pleasant driving
NOTE
● For vehicles with automatic air conditioning, an automatic
fresh/recirculation control function is included to improve
the efficiency of the air conditioning. If the outside air
temperature rises, the air conditioning automatically
switches to the recirculation mode. To deactivate the automatic fresh/recirculation control, press the air selection
switch while the ignition switch is “ON”. However, once
the automatic fresh/recirculation control is deactivated, it
can only be reactivated by ignition switch is “OFF”.
● When the recirculation mode is selected by the automatic
fresh/recirculation control, the air conditioning will
switch to the outside air mode for about 30 seconds at
intervals of approximately 20 minutes in order to ventilate
the passenger compartment.
5
5-16
!
CAUTION
● Normally, use the outside position to keep the windscreen and side windows clear and quickly remove
fog or frost from the windscreen.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated use the
recirculation position. Switch to the outside position
periodically to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.
● Use of the recirculation position for extended time
may cause the windows to fog up.
For pleasant driving
Air conditioning switch
NOTE
E00703501131
Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn
on. The air conditioning indicator lamp (A) will come on.
● If the air conditioning indicator lamp is flashing, the air
conditioning system may be malfunctioning. Press the air
conditioning switch to turn off the air conditioning, and
then press the switch again to turn on the air conditioning.
If the air conditioning indicator lamp flashes again after a
while, consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point. If the air conditioning indicator lamp no
longer flashes, there is no problem.
5
Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will
stop working and the indicator lamp goes off.
!
CAUTION
● When using the air conditioning, the idling speed
may slightly increase as the air conditioning compressor is switched on/off automatically. While the
vehicle with an automated manual transmission is
stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from creeping.
5-17
For pleasant driving
Operating the air conditioning system
Cooling
E00722000024
E00704100834
Heating
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position and set the air
selection switch (A) to the outside position.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anticlockwise to
the desired temperature. Select the desired blower speed.
5
NOTE
● For maximum heat, set the blower speed at the 3rd position.
5-18
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
4. Change your desired temperature by turning the control
dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
5. Select the desired blower speed.
NOTE
● If the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated, or if
high cooling performance is desired, set air selection
switch to the recirculation position and the temperature
control dial all the way to the left.
Switch to the outside position periodically to increase
ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.
For pleasant driving
Combination of unheated air and heated air
Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
E00722100025
Select the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration and set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the upper part
of the passenger compartment. Select desired blower speed.
E00722200055
!
CAUTION
● For safety, make sure you have a clear view through
all windows.
To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and door windows, use the mode selection dial. (Foot / Demister position or
Demister position)
5
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or slightly warm
air (depending upon temperature setting) flows to the upper
part of the passenger compartment.
5-19
For pleasant driving
For ordinary demisting
Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door windows clear
of mist, and to keep leg area heating (when driving in rain or
snow).
5
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
2. Set the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration.
3. Select your desired blower speed by turning the blower
speed selection dial.
4. Select your desired temperature by turning the temperature control dial.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
5-20
For quick demisting
30°
1. Set the mode selection dial to the position shown in the
illustration.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest position.
NOTE
● While the mode selection dial is set to the position shown
in the illustration, the air conditioning will operate automatically and the outside air position will also be selected
automatically. (In this case, the air conditioning indicator
will not change)
● To demist effectively, direct the air flow from the side
ventilators towards the door windows.
● Do not set the temperature control dial to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the window glasses
and form mist on them.
For pleasant driving
● For Clear Tec models, if the mode selection dial is set to
the demister position shown in the illustration (within
±15° of the center), the Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system
will not operate and the engine will not stop automatically
even if the vehicle is stopped. This is to ensure that good
visibility is maintained.
Important operation tips for the air
conditioning
E00708300948
● Park the vehicle in the shade.
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle inside
extremely hot, and it will require more to cool the interior.
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for
the first few minutes of air conditioning operation to expel
the hot air.
● Close the windows when the air conditioning is in use.
The entry of outside air through open windows will
reduce the cooling efficiency.
● Too much cooling is not good for the health. The inside
air temperature should only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside
air temperature.
● When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
which is located in front of the windscreen, is free of
obstructions such as leaves and snow. Leaves collected in
the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the
plenum water drains.
5-21
5
For pleasant driving
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause
might be a refrigerant leak. We recommend you to have the
system inspected.
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged
with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant SUN-PAG56.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage which will result in the need to replace your vehicle’s
entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into
the atmosphere should be prevented.
It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered and recycled for further use.
During a long period of disuse
5
The air conditioning should be operated for at least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This is to prevent poor
lubrication of the compressor internal parts and to maintain the
air conditioning in the best operating condition.
5-22
Air purifier
E00708400024
An air filter has been incorporated into this air conditioning so
that dirt and dust are cleaned from the air.
Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to clean the air
will be reduced as it collects pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”.
NOTE
● Operation in certain conditions such as driving on a dusty
road and frequent use of the air conditioning can lead to
reduction of service life of the filter. When the air flow
rate suddenly drops or when the windscreen or windows
start to fog up easily, the air filter requires replacement.
We recommend you to have it checked.
For pleasant driving
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio
with CD player*
Volume and tone control panel
E00708600882
E00708501673
The audio system can be used when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “ACC” position.
NOTE
● To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped,
turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.
For Clear Tec models, the audio system will continue to
operate if the ignition switch is in the “ON” position when
the engine stops automatically. However, in some cases,
the audio system may stop producing sound or turn off.
● If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create
noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that
anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
● If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or
if smoke or a strange odour comes from it, immediately
turn off the audio system. We recommend you to have it
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. Avoid continuous usage without inspection by a qualified person.
123456-
PWR (On-Off) switch
VOL (Volume control) knob
Memory select buttons
AUDIO button
Display
Audio adjust button
5
5-23
For pleasant driving
To adjust the volume
BAL (Left/Right balance control)
E00708700463
VOL (Volume control)
Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the volume;
anticlockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be displayed in the display (5).
To adjust the tone
E00708800914
Press the AUDIO button (4) to select SCV → BASS → TRE
→ FADE → BAL → Audio adjust mode off. The status will be
displayed in the display (5).
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume)
SCV function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOLUME, BASS, and TREBLE settings in accordance with the
vehicle speed. Press the audio adjust button (6) either
or
to select OFF or the desired settings 1-6.
5
BASS (Bass tone control)
Press the audio adjust button (6) either
desired bass tone quality.
or
to select the
or
to select the
TRE (Treble tone control)
Press the audio adjust button (6) either
desired treble tone quality.
FADE (Front/Rear balance control)
Press the audio adjust button (6) either
or
to balance
the volume of sound from the front and the rear speakers.
5-24
Press the audio adjust button (6) either
or
to balance
the volume of sound from the left and the right speakers.
NOTE
● Audio adjust mode will be canceled when radio or CD
operation is performed or no adjustment is performed for
more than 7 seconds or press the AUDIO button (4) for 2
seconds or longer.
For pleasant driving
To enter audio tone settings into the memory
It is possible to enter the audio adjustment condition (SCV,
BASS, TRE, FADE, BAL) into the memory.
1. Make the desired adjustments in the audio adjust mode.
Refer to “To adjust the tone” on page 5-24.
2. In the audio adjust mode, press and hold one of the memory select buttons (3) [1-6]. When you hear a bleep, the
memorization is complete. The display will show the button number [SOUND1-SOUND6] for which the settings
were memorised.
3. In future, when you gently press the memory select button
in the audio adjust mode, the audio adjustment condition
memorised for that button will take effect.
5
5-25
For pleasant driving
Radio control panel and display
E00708900931
5
123456789-
5-26
PWR (On-Off) switch
Memory select buttons
FM/AM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button
TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button
ST (Stereo) indicator
FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicators
Preset memory number display
Frequency display window
For pleasant driving
To listen to the radio
To enter frequencies into the memory
E00709000711
1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audio system on and
off.
Press the FM/AM button (3) to turn on the radio if a CD is
being played.
2. Press the FM/AM button (3) to select the desired band.
3. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune to a station,
or press one of the memory select button (2) to recall a
station memorised for that button.
E00716100974
Manual setting
You can assign to the memory select buttons (2) a maximum of
18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6 FM2 and 6 FM3 stations)
and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band. (Stations already
assigned to the memory select buttons are replaced by any
newly assigned stations.)
To tune the radio
E00709100073
Automatic tuning
After keeping the TUNE/SEEK button (4 or 5) depressed until
it beeps, release the button, and the selected station reception
will start.
Manual tuning
The frequency changes every time the TUNE/SEEK button (4
or 5) is pressed. Press the button to select the desired station.
5
5-27
For pleasant driving
Follow the steps described below.
1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (4 or 5) to tune the
frequency to be entered in the memory.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) for 2 seconds
or longer. The sound will be momentarily interrupted
while the frequency is being entered into the memory.
The number of the buttons corresponding to the entry in
the memory and the frequency are displayed.
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
button and then releasing it within 2 seconds.
NOTE
● Disconnecting the battery terminal erases all the radio frequencies stored in the memory.
5
Automatic setting
With the method, all manually set stations in the band currently
selected for reception are replaced with stations in the same
band that are automatically selected in order of signal strength.
The radio automatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and LW band.
Follow the steps described below.
1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the FM/AM button (3) for 2 seconds or longer. The 6 stations with the
best signal strength will automatically be assigned to the
memory select buttons (2), with the lowest-frequency station being assigned to the lowest-number button.
2. When you subsequently press a memory select button to
select a channel number, the radio will begin receiving the
station assigned to that number.
5-28
NOTE
● If you press the FM/AM button (3) for 2 seconds or longer
while tuning in the FM1 or FM2 band, the radio will automatically switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
seeking/storing will be activated.
For pleasant driving
Radio data system (RDS)
E00709200348
1234567891011121314-
PWR (On-Off) switch
Memory select buttons
TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button
TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button
FM/AM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
TP (Traffic program) button
PTY (Program type) button
Menu button
RDS (Radio data system) indicator
AF (Alternative frequencies) indicator
TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
PTY (Program type)/CT (Clock time) indicator
Frequency display window
REG (Regional program) indicator
5
5-29
For pleasant driving
RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM
broadcasting programs, and picks up the FM stations that are
transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.
Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for
example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other
station transmitting the same program when you are leaving
the service area of the currently receiving station.
The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement
to the EON (enhanced other network) and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function
E00720900146
5
The AF function finds a station broadcasting the same program
and selects the station with the strongest signal of AF lists.
The AF function is turned on (with the AF indicator (10)
shown on the display) at all times unless you manually switch
it off.
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.
E00721100015
REG function limits to receive the stations broadcasting
regional programs.
Regional programming and regional networks are organized
differently depending on the country or area (they may be
changed according to the hour, state, or broadcast area), so if
you don’t want to receive the regional programs automatically,
you can set up REG ON not to receive regional programs.
The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.
PI (Program Identification) search function
E00721200175
When travelling long distance and the recalled preset station is
weak, the radio searches another frequency broadcasting the
same programming with the same PI code in AF list.
If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same programming, the radio searches a frequency broadcasting the regional
programming. The radio succeeds in searching the regional
programming, then the display shows the REG indicator (14).
If the radio does not succeed in searching the regional programming, the radio returns to the recalled preset station.
The PI function can be turned ON and OFF on some vehicles.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.
CT (Clock Time) function
E00721000128
The clock can be set automatically by using the signal from the
local RDS stations. Refer to “Digital clock” on page 5-56.
5-30
REG (Regional) function
NOTE
● While searching, the audio system is muted. The display
shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”.
For pleasant driving
PTY (Program type)
E00721300264
RDS broadcasts are classified according to program type
(PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to
select your desired PTY.
1. NEWS
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)
3. INFO (Information)
4. SPORT
5. EDUCATE (Education)
6. DRAMA
7. CULTURE
8. SCIENCE
9. VARIED
10. POP M (Pop music)
11. ROCK M (Rock music)
12. EASY M (Easy music)
13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
14. CLASSICS
15. OTHER M (Other music)
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
17. FINANCE
18. CHILDREN
19. SOCIAL
20. RELIGION
21. PHONE IN
22. TRAVEL
23. LEISURE
24. JAZZ
25. COUNTRY
26. NATION M (National music)
27. OLDIES
28. FOLK M (Folk music)
29. DOCUMENT
30. TEST
31. ALARM
5
5-31
For pleasant driving
To search for a broadcast of desired program type:
1. Press the PTY button (7).
2. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) for less than 1 second at a time to select your desired PTY.
3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been selected, the
radio will begin to search for a broadcast of your selected
PTY. During search, the selected PTY on the display
blinks and the radio will begin to search for a broadcast of
your selected PTY.
4. When the radio picks up a station with your desired PTY,
the display will show the name of the station.
5
5-32
NOTE
● If the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed for more
than 1 second, the radio will try to find out another broadcast of the same program type as currently selected.
● If no station is found with your desired PTY, the display
will show “EMPTY” for about 5 seconds and the radio
will return to the previous station.
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400034
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory.
Follow the steps described below.
1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to tune the
PTY to be entered in the memory.
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) for 2 seconds
or longer. The sound will be momentarily interrupted
while the PTY is being entered into the memory. The
number of the button corresponding to the entry into the
memory and the PTY are displayed.
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by pressing the
button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.
For pleasant driving
To change the language of PTY display
E00721500194
You can select your favourite language among English, French,
German, Swedish, Spanish and Italian.
1. Press the MENU button (8) to select the language of PTY
display mode.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.
2. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to select a language.
NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the MENU button (8) for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 7 seconds.
5
5-33
For pleasant driving
Traffic information
E00721600225
5
The radio will automatically tune in to traffic information
broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts or playing compact
discs.
To select this function, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the TP button (6). The display will show “TP” (11).
If the RDS data can be read, the display will show “RDS”
(9). If not, the display will show “NO RDS” for about 5
seconds.
2. If the radio detects traffic information on either the station
currently selected or another station, the display will show
“TRAF INF” for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indication of the frequency. Then, it will show the name of the
station broadcasting the traffic information to which you
will listen. The volume level is set separately for listening
to normal audio programs and for listening to traffic information. The volume level will therefore change automatically to that set when an emergency broadcast or traffic
information was last received. When the traffic information broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously received program and to the corresponding volume
level.
3. Press the TP button (6) to return to the previous condition.
NOTE
● While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops only at TP stations even if the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed.
5-34
For pleasant driving
TP (Traffic information Programme) search function
E00721800155
Emergency broadcasts
E00721700183
The traffic information programme standby function is turned
on (with the TP indicator (11) shown on the display) and after
about 45 seconds since the RDS indicator (9) turns off due to
weak signal or the tuning station is changed over from a TP
station to a station which does not broadcast traffic information, the sound will beep 5 times and seeks out a TP station in
all frequencies automatically.
The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.
Except during MW tuning, if an emergency broadcast is caught
when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position, the
display will show “ALARM” and the emergency broadcast
will interrupt the current program. The volume level is set separately for listening to normal audio programs and for listening
to emergency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore
change automatically to that set when an emergency broadcast
or traffic information broadcast was last received. When the
emergency broadcast is over, the radio will return to the previously received programme and to the corresponding volume
level.
5-35
5
For pleasant driving
Function setup mode
E00722500348
It is possible to change the following functions:
● AF
● CT
● REG
● TP-S
● PI-S
● PHONE IN
● MUTE
● Language of PTY display
1. Press the “MENU” button to select the function setup
mode.
5
5-36
For pleasant driving
2. Press the “MENU” button repeatedly to select the mode
you wish to change. The order is: AF → CT → REG →
TP-S → PI-S → PHONE IN (PH) → MUTE → Language
of PTY display → Function setup mode OFF.
NOTE
● Although “PHONE IN (PH)” and “MUTE” appear on the
display, the PHONE IN and MUTE functions are inoperative.
● “MUTE” will appear only if the PHONE IN function is
set to “PH ON”.
5-37
5
For pleasant driving
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be turned ON
and OFF as shown below.
The setting will be shown on the display.
Example
5
NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the “MENU” button for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 7 seconds.
● For instructions on setting the language of PTY display,
refer to “To change the language of PTY display” on page
5-33.
5-38
For pleasant driving
CD control panel and display (MP3 compatible type)
E00709500950
music CDs
MP3 CDs
123456789101112131415-
PWR (On-Off) switch
CD eject button
Disc-loading slot
FOLDER (Folder down) button
FOLDER (Folder up) button
TEXT (Title display) button
PAGE (Title scroll) button
FM/AM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
CD button
RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button
TRACK (Track down/up) button
CD indicator
TRACK indicator
DISC TEXT indicator
NAME indicator
1617181920-
RPT (Repeat-mode) indicator
RDM/D-RDM (Random-mode) indicator
Track play time display
FOLDER indicator
MP3 indicator
5
5-39
For pleasant driving
To listen to a CD
To fast forward/reverse the disc
E00709601554
1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.
When a disc is inserted, the CD player will begin playing
even if the radio is being used. The CD player will also
start playback when the CD button (9) is pressed with a
disc in the player even if the radio is being used.
2. To stop the CD, turn off the power by pressing the PWR
switch (1), or change over to the radio mode by pressing
the FM/AM button (8), or change over to the external
audio input mode by pressing the CD button (9), or eject
the disc by pressing the eject button (2).
NOTE
5
● To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page 5-24 and “To adjust the tone” on page 5-24.
● When an 8 cm compact disc is used, the adapter is not
used for playback. Insert the disc in the centre of the discloading slot.
● For information concerning the handling of compact
discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 5-53.
5-40
To fast forward or reverse, use the TRACK buttons (11).
Fast forward
You can fast forward by holding down the
side of the
TRACK button (11) for more than about 1 second.
Fast reverse
You can fast reverse by holding down the
side of the
TRACK button (11) for more than about 1 second.
NOTE
● When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed the disc, the
playing-time may be shown with deviation.
For pleasant driving
To listen an MP3 CD
This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and
CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet,
and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 100
trees, 100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During MP3 playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information. For information
concerning ID3 tag, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display” on
page 5-45.
1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot.
When a disc is inserted, the CD player will begin playing
even if the radio being used. The CD player will also start
playback when the CD button (9) is pressed with a disc in
the player even if the radio is being used.
2. Press the CD button (9) for 2 seconds or longer to switch
to MP3 CD mode from normal music CD mode. The display shows “READING”, then playback will begin. The
folder number and the track number will appear on the
display.
5
5-41
For pleasant driving
NOTE
5
● While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital
Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can
switch between reading of the CD-DA, and reading of the
MP3 files by pressing the CD button (9) for 2 seconds or
longer (until you hear a beep).
● Lightly press the CD button (9) to switch the external
audio input mode.
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
CD-DA are automatically played first.
● The playback sound quality differs depending on the
encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the
user manual of your encoding software.
● Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may
take some time before playback starts.
● MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied to this unit.
● You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 files recorded with certain
writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
● If you record too many folders or files other than MP3
onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
● This unit does not record MP3 files.
● For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, refer to “Notes
on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-55.
!
CAUTION
● Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format
which has the “.mp3” file name may produce noise
from the speakers and speaker damage, and can
damage your hearing.
5-42
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)
Root folder (root directory)
Tree 1
Folder selection
In the order
File selection
In the order
Tree 2
Tree 3
Tree 4
For pleasant driving
To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)
To select a desired track
You can select your desired folder by pressing the FOLDER
buttons (4 or 5).
You can select your desired track by using the TRACK button
(11).
Track up
Press the
side of the TRACK button (11) repeatedly until
the desired track number appears on the display.
Track down
Press the
side of the TRACK button (11) repeatedly until
the desired track number appears on the display.
NOTE
● Pressing the
side of the TRACK button (11) once during the song will cause the CD player to restart playback
from the beginning of the song.
Folder up
Press the FOLDER button (5) until the desired folder number
appears on the display.
5
Folder down
Press the FOLDER button (4) until the desired folder number
appears on the display.
5-43
For pleasant driving
To repeat a track
Press the RPT/RDM button (10) while the track is playing.
“RPT” will appear on the display. To exit the repeat mode,
repeatedly press the RPT/RDM button until the “RPT” display
disappears.
To change the order of tracks for playback
Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)
Press the RPT/RDM button (10) two times. “RDM” will appear
on the display. Tracks on the currently selected disc will be
played in a random sequence.
To exit the random mode, repeatedly press the RPT/RDM button until the “RDM” display disappears.
Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)
Press the RPT/RDM button (10) two times. “RDM” will appear
on the display. Tracks in the currently selected folder will be
played in a random sequence. To exit the random mode, repeatedly press the RPT/RDM button until the “RDM” display disappears.
5
NOTE
● The repeat mode will be cancelled by pressing the track
button (11) or eject button (2).
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
repeat mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA
only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.
5-44
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only)
Press the RPT/RDM button (10) three times. “D-RDM” will
appear on the display. Tracks from all the folders on the currently selected disc will be played in a random sequence. To
exit the random mode, repeatedly press the RPT/RDM button
until the “D-RDM” display disappears.
For pleasant driving
CD text
The CD player can display disc and track titles for discs
encoded with disc and track title information. Press the TEXT
button (6) repeatedly to make selections in the following
sequence: disc name → track name → normal display mode.
Disc name
NOTE
● With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the
random mode causes only files of the same format (CDDA only or MP3 files only) to be played in a random
sequence.
To eject a disc
When the CD eject button (2) is pressed, the disc automatically
stops and is ejected. The system automatically switches to
radio mode.
Track name
5
Normal
display
mode
CD text and MP3 title display
E00725000504
This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles including
ID3 tag information.
5-45
For pleasant driving
NOTE
● The display can show up to 11 characters. If a disc name
or track name has more than 11 characters, press the
PAGE button (7) to view the next 11 characters.
● When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
● Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as
an asterisk.
MP3 title
The CD player can display folder and track titles for discs
encoded with folder and track information. Press the TEXT
button (6) for less than 1 second repeatedly to make selections
in the following sequence: folder name → track name → normal display mode.
Folder name
Track name
5
Normal
display
mode
5-46
For pleasant driving
ID3 tag information
The CD player can display ID3 tag information for files that
have been recorded with ID3 tag information.
1. Press the TEXT button (6) for 2 seconds or longer to
switch to the ID3 tag information. “TAG” will appear on
the display for 2 seconds, and then the ID3 tag information will appear.
2. Press the TEXT button (6) for less than 1 second repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: album
name → track name → artist name → normal display
mode.
To use the external audio input function
E00732200348
NOTE
● To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name,
press the TEXT button (6) again for 2 seconds or longer.
● When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
● The display can show up to 11 characters. If a folder
name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has
more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button (7) to
view the next 11 characters.
● Folder names, track names and items of ID3 tag information can each be displayed up to a length of 32 characters.
● Characters that the CD player cannot display are shown as
an asterisk.
1- Auxiliary Audio connector (mini-jack)
2- AUX button
3- AUX display
5
5-47
For pleasant driving
You can listen to commercially available audio equipment,
such as a portable audio system, from your vehicle’s speakers,
by connecting the audio equipment to the auxiliary audio connector (1).
NOTE
● Use a stereo mini-jack connector to connect the audio
equipment to the auxiliary audio connector.
To activate the external audio input mode
1. Connect the headphone port of the portable audio system
to the auxiliary audio connector (1) using a commercially
available connection cord.
2. Press the AUX button (2).
The display (3) will show “AUX” and then the external
audio input mode will be activated.
3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, press the
AUX button (2). To switch to another mode.
5
!
CAUTION
● Do not operate the connected audio equipment while
driving.
This could distract you and an accident might occur.
5-48
NOTE
● The connected audio equipment cannot be operated with
the vehicle’s audio system.
● Depending on the connected audio equipment, it may produce noise from the speakers.
● Use the connected audio equipment’s own power source,
such as its battery.
Noise may be produced from the speakers if the connected
audio equipment is used while charging it using the accessory socket of the vehicle.
● Do not activate the external audio input mode when no
audio equipment is connected.
Otherwise, noise may be produced from the speakers.
● Connect audio equipment when the external audio input
mode is deactivated or lower the vehicle’s speaker volume
before connecting it.
Noise may be produced from the speakers if audio equipment is connected after the external audio input mode is
activated.
● Compared to the CD player mode and radio mode, the
vehicle’s speaker volume will be lower in the external
audio input mode. Therefore, be careful when switching
from the external audio input mode to the CD player mode
or radio mode since the speaker volume will be higher.
● Do not use excessive force on the connection cord. Otherwise, the cord and connectors may be damaged.
● If the connection cord alone is left connected to the auxiliary audio connector, noise may be produced from the
speakers.
● For information on how to connect and operate the commercially available audio equipment, refer to the owner’s
manual for the commercially available audio equipment.
For pleasant driving
Steering wheel audio remote
control switches*
Turning on the power
E00710000447
The remote control switch is located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
It can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” positions.
Press the power switch (3) to turn on the power. When you turn
the power on, the mode that was selected when the power was
last turned off appears. To turn off the power, press and hold
down the power switch (3) for about 2 seconds until you hear a
beep.
Volume adjustment
Volume up button - 1
While the button is pressed, the volume continues to increase.
Volume down button - 2
While the button is pressed, the volume continues to decrease.
Mode selection
Press the mode selector button (3) to select the desired mode.
The mode changes in the following order.
FM1 → FM2 → FM3 → MW → LW → CD → AUX → FM1
To listen to the radio
Press the mode selector button (3) to select the desired band
(LW/MW/FM).
12345-
Volume up button
Volume down button
Power switch / mode selector button
Seek up / track up / fast-forward button
Seek down / track down / fast-reverse button
Automatic tuning
Seek up button - 4/ Seek down button - 5
After pressing these buttons, reception of the selected station
will begin.
NOTE
● When operating the steering wheel audio remote control
switches, do not operate more than one at the same time.
5-49
5
For pleasant driving
To listen to a CD
Press the mode selector button (3) and select CD mode.
To fast-forward/reverse the disc
To fast-forward/reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button
(4) or the fast-reverse button (5).
Fast-forward
You can fast-forward the disc by holding down the fast-forward button (4). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will
be fast-forwarded.
Fast-reverse
You can fast-reverse the disc by holding down the fast-reverse
button (5). While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be
fast-reversed.
NOTE
5
● In the case of an MP3 CD, you can fast-forward and fastreverse tracks in the same folder.
To select a desired track
You can select your desired track by using the track up button
(4) or the track down button (5).
NOTE
● Pressing the track down button (5) once during the song
will cause the system to restart playing from the beginning
of the song.
5-50
For pleasant driving
Error codes
E00710100972
If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Error display
Problem
Item
5
Repair
NO DISC
No disc inserted
Disc is not in CD player.
Insert disc.
E 01
Focus error
Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc.
Insert disc with label facing up.
Remove moisture from disc.
E 02
Disc error
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or
excessive vehicle vibration.
Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations
stop.
E 03
Mechanism error
Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of
position.
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, have
the equipment inspected.
E HOT
Inside of audio system is Internal protection against high temperaAllow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
hot.
tures.
5-51
For pleasant driving
Error display
Problem
Item
Repair
E
Communication or
power supply error
Communication error between external
device and audio equipment.
Power supply error of external device.
NO MP3
NO MP3 file in the
inserted disc
MP3 CD mode was selected even though Switch to CD mode or insert CD that contains
inserted disc does not contain MP3 file. MP3 file.
5
5-52
Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorised
Service Point.
For pleasant driving
Handling compact discs
E00723000207
● Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark
shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or
CD-RW discs may cause problems.)
5
● The use of damaged compact discs (such as cracked discs)
or low-quality compact discs (such as warped discs or
burrs on the discs) such as those illustrated will damage
the CD player.
5-53
For pleasant driving
● In the following circumstances, moisture can form on
discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal
operation.
• When there is high humidity (for example, when it is
raining).
• When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after
the heater is turned on in cold weather.
5
In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry
out.
● When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations,
such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not
work.
● When storing compact discs, always store them in their
separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is
high.
● Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isn’t a
label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect
the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always
hold it by the outer edge and the centre hole.
5-54
● To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly
from the centre hole towards the outer edge. Do not wipe
in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint
thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the
disc.
● Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write
on the label surface of the disc.
For pleasant driving
● Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers (B) on compact discs. Do not use any compact disc on which a label
or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that
has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off
label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD
player may stop working properly and you may not be
able to eject the compact disc.
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
E00725100026
● You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs
recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due
to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,
scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
● CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and
high humidity than ordinary music CDs. Leaving them
inside a vehicle for extended periods may damage them
and make playback impossible.
● The unit may not successfully play back a CD-R/RW that
was made by the combination of writing software, a CD
recorder (CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are incompatible with one another.
● This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session
is not closed.
● This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain
other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
● Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CDR/RW disc.
!
WARNING
● Operating the CD player in a manner other than
specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover
and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself.
There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of
malfunction, we recommend you to have it checked.
5-55
5
For pleasant driving
Antenna
Digital clock*
E00710500396
E00711800338
Roof antenna
To display the clock
To remove the roof antenna, unscrew it by turning it anticlockwise.
Press the
(CLOCK) button to switch the clock mode. To
exit the clock mode, press the
(CLOCK) button.
CD player mode
Clock mode
5
NOTE
● Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases:
• When entering a place with low clearance.
• When going into an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.
5-56
For pleasant driving
NOTE
● While the clock mode is selected, the display will switch
to the applicable operation display whenever the CD
player, external audio input mode or radio is operated.
Then, if no entries are made for 7 seconds, the display will
automatically return to the clock mode.
● While the clock mode is selected, the display will not
switch to the applicable operation display when the CD is
fast-forwarded or fast-reversed.
● During automatic tuning in the radio mode, the automatic
tuning will stop and the clock mode will be displayed
when the
(CLOCK) button is pressed. In addition, the
radio will return to the previous station before automatic
tuning began.
To adjust the clock
Automatic mode and manual mode is available for digital
clock adjustment:
Select the automatic mode or the manual mode by performing
the following operations:
1. Press the PWR switch (A) to turn ON the audio system.
2. Enter the function setup mode by pressing the Menu button (B).
5
5-57
For pleasant driving
5
3. Press the Menu button (B) repeatedly to select the CT
(Clock Time) mode.
The order is: AF → CT → REG → TP-S → PI-S →
PHONE IN (PH) → MUTE → Language of PTY display
→ Function setup mode OFF
(Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-36.)
5-58
NOTE
● Although “PHONE IN (PH)” and “MUTE” appear on the
display, the PHONE IN and MUTE function is inoperative.
● “MUTE” will appear only if the PHONE IN function is
set to “PH ON”.
For pleasant driving
4. Select the desired setting for each mode to be turned ON
and OFF.
Automatic mode
The automatic mode can set the local time automatically by
using the signal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Radio
data system (RDS)” on page 5-29.
CT ON- Automatic mode
CT OFF- Manual mode
5
NOTE
● After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup
mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the Menu button (B) for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 7 seconds.
5-59
For pleasant driving
Manual mode
The manual mode is also available in case the “Automatic
mode” shows the incorrect time when the adjacent local RDS
stations are located in a different time zone. Refer to “Radio
data system (RDS)” on page 5-29.
H
M
CLOCK
5
Set the time by pressing the various buttons as described
below.
1. Keep the
(CLOCK) button pressed until the time display flashes.
2. Press the appropriate buttons to adjust the time.
“H” button “M” button -
To adjust the hour
To adjust the minutes
3. To exit the adjust mode, press the
5-60
(CLOCK) button.
NOTE
● When using the manual mode to adjust the clock, set the
“CT” function to “OFF”. If the “CT” function is set to
“ON”, the time will automatically be corrected using the
signals from the local RDS stations even if it was set manually.
● If the battery cables are disconnected during repairs or for
any other reason, reset the clock to the correct time after
they are reconnected.
● The digital clock does not have a second display. When
the “minute” display is adjusted and reset to zero, the
clock begins at zero seconds for the selected minute.
For pleasant driving
Sun visors
Vanity mirror
E00711201010
E00711300708
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor.
Driver’s side
1- To eliminate front glare
2- To eliminate side glare
5
Passenger’s side
5-61
For pleasant driving
Accessory socket
E00711601085
The accessory socket can be used while the ignition switch is
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position.
Open the cap to uncover the socket. Use it to plug in an electrical device.
!
CAUTION
● Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory operating
at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using the socket, make sure the total power
consumption of the electrical accessories does not
exceed 120 W at 12 V.
Also be aware that using electronic equipment with
the engine off may run the battery down.
● When the accessory socket is not in use, be sure to
close the cap, because the socket might become
clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited.
NOTE
● Long use of the electric appliance without running the
engine may run down the battery.
5
5-62
For pleasant driving
Interior lamps
Room lamp with map lamps
E00724300018
E00712000799
The interior lamps go on when a door or tailgate is opened.
When all doors and tailgate are closed, the interior lamps are
illuminated and dimmed gradually for 15 seconds then go out.
However, the interior lamps go out immediately without being
dimmed in the following cases:
● The ignition switch is turned “ON”.
● All doors and tailgate are locked using the key mechanism
of the driver’s door, the lock knob of the driver’s door, or
the remote control switch of the keyless entry system.
Room lamp
Opening a door or the tailgate makes the room lamp come on.
Closing it makes the room lamp go off.
NOTE
● The dimming period is adjustable.
For further information, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
● If you leave the lamps on without running the engine, you
will run down the battery. Before you leave the vehicle,
make sure that all the lamps are off.
5
5-63
For pleasant driving
Map lamps
Push the map lamp cover to turn on the lamp. Push it again to
turn it off.
Luggage compartment lamp
E00712700480
The luggage compartment lamp (A) is located on left-hand side
(3-door models) or the right-hand side (5-door models) of the
luggage compartment.
Opening a door or the tailgate makes the luggage compartment
lamp come on. Closing it makes the luggage compartment
lamp go off.
3-door models
5
5-64
For pleasant driving
Storage spaces
5-door models
E00713101244
!
CAUTION
● Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated drink, and
spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in
hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot,
so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire
and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may
rupture. The heat may also deform or crack plastic
spectacle lenses and other spectacle parts that are
made of plastic.
● Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving
the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space
could otherwise cause injuries.
NOTE
● Do not leave valuables in any storage space when leaving
the vehicle.
5-65
5
For pleasant driving
3-door models
5-door models
1- Luggage floor boxes
2- Luggage floor lid*
3- Glove box, Cool box*
5
5-66
For pleasant driving
Glove box
Pen holder, coin holder and card holder
E00717600963
To open the glove box, pull the lid towards you while pressing
the lever (A).
The glove box contains a pen holder (B), a coin holder (C) and
card holder (D).
5
5-67
For pleasant driving
Cool box*
E00721900084
The cool box (A) is located inside the glove box.
You can put plastic and other bottles in the box.
The cool box can be operated when the air conditioning is
operating.
Refer to the “Automatic air conditioning” section on page
5-13.
1. Set the cool box dial (B) inside the glove box to the
position.
NOTE
● When the cool box is not being used, set the cool box dial
to the
position.
5
5-68
For pleasant driving
2. Select the desired blower speed by turning the dial (C).
3. Select the desired temperature by turning the temperature
control dial (D).
4. Set the mode selection dial (F) within the face position
range as shown in the illustration.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (E).
Luggage floor lid (5-door models)*
E00734400025
Raise the luggage floor lid to store articles in the luggage compartment.
!
CAUTION
● Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seatback
height.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due to hindered rearward view or flying objects during sudden braking.
To use
Raise the luggage floor lid (A).
5
NOTE
● Do not put things that decay easily in the cool box.
5-69
For pleasant driving
NOTE
● Raise the luggage floor lid (A) and insert it between the
rear seat and the support (B) to hold it in place.
To refit
To return the luggage floor lid to its original position, perform
the steps in reverse.
NOTE
● Fit the stoppers (C) on the bottom of the luggage floor lid
into the groove (D) in the support.
5
5-70
For pleasant driving
Luggage floor boxes
E00718700554
5-door models
The box for storing articles is located inside the luggage compartment.
3-door models
1- Luggage floor box (Front)
2- Luggage floor box (Rear)
NOTE
● For vehicles with the luggage floor lid (5-door models),
securely retain the lid before raising the luggage floor
boards. Refer to “Luggage floor lid (5-door models)” on
page 5-69.
5-71
5
For pleasant driving
To use
Raise the luggage floor board.
3-door models
5
5-72
5-door models
For pleasant driving
Cup holder
For the rear seat
E00714500671
!
CAUTION
E00716900099
The cup holder is located in front of the rear-center seat.
● Do not drink beverages while driving the vehicle;
doing so could distract you and result in an accident.
● Beverages can spill owing to vibration or other
movement during vehicle operation or owing to
opening and closing of the rear doors. Be careful not
to get scalded by a hot beverage if it spills.
For the front seat
The cup holders are located in front of the gearshift or allshift
lever.
5
5-73
For pleasant driving
Rear shelf panel*
To remove
E00715400071
Unsnap by lifting the shelf panel pivoting points.
3-door models
The rear shelf panel is provided in the luggage area.
To stow
Stow the removed rear shelf panel in the luggage compartment.
5
NOTE
● Do not place heavy luggage (more than about 1 kg) on the
rear shelf panel.
5-74
For pleasant driving
5-door models
The rear shelf panel is provided in the luggage area.
The rear shelf panel can be locked in the upright position.
To remove
1. Unsnap by lifting the rear shelf panel pivoting points.
To lock
To stow
Stow the removed rear shelf panel in the luggage compartment.
1. Lift the rear shelf panel.
2. Slide the rear shelf panel to the right until it contacts the
stopper (A) to lock it.
3. To lower the rear shelf panel, perform the locking steps in
the reverse.
!
NOTE
● Do not place heavy luggage (more than about 1 kg) on the
rear shelf panel.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the vehicle with the rear shelf panel
in the upright position. Otherwise, serious accidents
could result due to restricted rear vision.
5-75
5
For pleasant driving
Coat hooks*
E00725600382
There are 2 hooks on the rear pillar intended to hang clothes
on.
5
!
WARNING
● Do not put a hanger or any heavy or pointed object
on the coat hook. If the curtain air bag would be
activated, any such item could be propelled away
with great force and could prevent the curtain air
bag from inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Make
sure there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of clothes that you hang on the coat hook.
5-76
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Tools, jack and tyre repair kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Jacking up the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6How to change a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Operation under adverse driving conditions . . . . .6-
2
2
6
9
21
24
27
34
41
6
For emergencies
Emergency starting
If the vehicle breaks down
E00800100710
E00800501900
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to the shoulder
and use the hazard warning flashers and/or the warning triangle
etc.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page 3-38.
If the engine cannot be started because the battery is weak or
dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper
cables to start the engine.
If the engine stops/fails
Vehicle operation and control are affected if the engine stops.
Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be aware of the following:
● The brake booster becomes inoperative and the pedal
effort will increase. Press down the brake pedal harder
than usual.
● Since the power steering system is no longer operative,
the steering wheel feels heavy when turning it. Turn the
wheel with more effort than usual.
!
1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other.
If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t
want. The vehicle will not start, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
!
6
WARNING
● To start the engine using jumper cables connected to
another vehicle, perform the correct procedures
according to the instruction manual. Incorrect procedures could result in a fire or explosion or damage
to the vehicles.
CAUTION
● Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery.
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting can damage both vehicles.
6-2
For emergencies
2. You could be injured if the vehicles move. Set the parking
brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “P” (PARK) or a manual transmission and an automated manual transmission in “N” (Neutral). With an
automated manual transmission vehicle, confirm that “N”
is shown by the allshift indicator display. Turn off the
ignition switch.
!
4. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
WARNING
● Turn off the ignition on both vehicles beforehand.
Use care to make sure that the cables or your clothes
are never caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
NOTE
● Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical loads. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
3. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper level.
Refer to “Battery” on page 8-14.
!
Vehicles with turbocharger
6
WARNING
● If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to
the proper level.
6-3
For emergencies
5. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative
(-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and the other end to
the engine block of the vehicle with the discharged battery
at the point farthest from the battery.
NOTE
● Open the cover before connecting the jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the battery.
Refer to “Battery” on page 8-14.
!
6
WARNING
● Be sure to observe the connecting sequence of
→
→
→ .
● Make sure that the connection
is made to the
appointed position (shown in the illustration). If the
connection is made directly to the negative side of
the battery, the inflammable gases generated from
the battery might catch fire and explode.
● When connecting the jumper cable, do not connect
the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal.
Otherwise sparks might cause explosion of the battery.
6-4
!
CAUTION
● Use care not to get the jumper cable caught in the
cooling fan or other rotating part in the engine compartment.
● Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result.
● Check the jumper cables for damage and corrosion
before use.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
!
CAUTION
● Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assistance running.
For emergencies
7. After the engine is started, disconnect the cables in the
reverse order.
!
WARNING
● Charging the battery while it is installed in the vehicle might cause the battery to catch fire and explode.
Or damage to the vehicle could result. If it has to be
charged in that condition for unavoidable reasons,
disconnect the vehicle side negative (-) terminal connected to the battery.
● Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away from the
battery because the battery may produce an explosion.
● Use adequate ventilation when charging or using the
battery in an enclosed space.
● Remove all the caps before charging the battery.
● Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid.
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into contact with
your hands, eyes, clothes and the painted surface of
your vehicle, it should be thoroughly flushed with
water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and thoroughly, and get
prompt medical attention.
!
CAUTION
● Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling or
pushing the vehicle.
It could damage your vehicle.
● Always wear protective eye goggles when working
near the battery.
● Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
NOTE
● If the vehicle is put in motion without fully charging the
battery, it might cause the loss of smooth engine operation
and the anti-lock brake warning lamp to illuminate.
Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on page 4-41.
● For Clear Tec models, press the “Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate the Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system and prevent the engine from automatically stopping before the battery is sufficiently charged.
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-24.
6
6-5
For emergencies
Engine overheating
E00800601839
If the high coolant temperature warning lamp flashes while the
engine is running, the engine may be overheating. If this
occurs, take the following corrective measures:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Check whether steam is coming from the engine compartment.
[If steam does not come from the engine compartment]
With the engine still running, raise the bonnet to ventilate
the engine compartment.
!
WARNING
● Be careful of hot steam, which could be blowing off
the reserve tank cap.
● Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap while the
engine is hot.
3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not
turning, stop the engine immediately and have it checked.
Front
NOTE
● For Clear Tec models, press the “Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) OFF” switch to deactivate the Auto Stop & Go
(AS&G) system before stopping the vehicle.
Refer to “To deactivate” on page 4-24.
[If steam is coming from the engine compartment]
Stop the engine, and when the steam stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine compartment. Restart the
engine.
6
!
WARNING
● Do not open the bonnet while steam is coming from
the engine compartment. It could cause steam or hot
water to spurt out, causing burns. Hot water could
spurt out even when there is no steam coming out,
and some parts will be very hot. Be very careful
when opening the bonnet.
6-6
A- Cooling fan
C- Reserve tank
!
WARNING
B- Radiator cap
● Be careful not to get your hands or clothes caught in
the cooling fan.
For emergencies
4. After the high coolant temperature warning lamp has gone
off, stop the engine.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the
“LOW” and “FULL” marks.
FULL
LOW
6
6-7
For emergencies
Vehicles with turbocharger
The reserve tank lid is equipped with a dipstick.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. Remove the dipstick and
read the coolant level, which should always be within the
range “F” (FULL) or “L” (LOW).
FULL
LOW
6
!
WARNING
● If there is none, make sure that the engine has
cooled down before removing the radiator cap (B),
because hot steam or boiling water otherwise will
gush from the filler port and may scald you.
6-8
6. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve tank if necessary (refer to the “Maintenance” section).
!
CAUTION
● Do not add coolant while the engine is hot. Suddenly
adding cold coolant could damage the engine. Wait
for the engine to cool down, then add coolant a little
at a time.
7. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leakage and the
drive belt for looseness or damage.
If there is anything wrong with the cooling system or
drive belt, we recommend you to have it checked and
repaired.
For emergencies
Tools, jack and tyre repair kit*
Except for vehicles with compact spare wheel
E00800901089
Storage
The storage location of the tools, jack and tyre repair kit should
be remembered in case of an emergency.
Vehicles with compact spare wheel
1- Tyre repair kit
2- Tyre compressor
3- Towing hook
NOTE
● The tools, jack and tyre repair kit are stored beneath the
luggage floor board of the luggage compartment.
1- Jack
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Towing hook
6-9
6
For emergencies
Tools
Tyre repair kit*
E00801900799
E00802200207
This kit enables emergency repair of a small puncture in the
tread area of a tyre that has run over a nail, screw, or similar
object.
1- Wheel nut wrench*
2- Towing hook
6
1- 80 km/h (50 mph) and 50
mph labels
2- Tyre sealant bottle
6-10
3- Tyre compressor
For emergencies
!
CAUTION
● The tyre sealant can cause health damage if swallowed. If you accidentally swallow it, drink as much
water as possible and immediately have yourself
examined by a doctor.
● If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or on your skin,
rinse it away with plenty of water. If you still sense
any abnormality, have yourself examined by a doctor.
● Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic reactions occur.
● Be careful not to allow children to touch the tyre
sealant.
● Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre sealant.
NOTE
● The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the situations
listed below. If any of these situations occurs, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point
or other specialist.
• The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed. (The expiry
date is shown on the bottle label.)
• More than one tyre is punctured.
• The puncture hole has a length or width of 4 mm or
more.
6-11
6
For emergencies
• The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A), not in the
tread (B).
6
• The vehicle has been driven with the tyre almost completely flat.
• The tyre has completely slipped over the wheel rim and
come off the wheel.
• The wheel is damaged.
● Use the tyre sealant only at ambient temperatures of 20 °C to + 60 °C.
● Effect an emergency repair without pulling out the object
(nail, screw, etc.) that is stuck in the tyre.
● Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre has been damaged
by being driven when insufficiently inflated (e.g. bumps,
cuts, cracks etc. on the tyre).
● Wipe tyre sealant off paintwork immediately with a damp
cloth.
6-12
● Immediately wash out any clothes contaminated with the
tyre sealant.
Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat
location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition
key to the “LOCK” position, move the gearshift lever to
the “R” (Reverse) position.
On vehicles with automated manual transmission, move
the allshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position, turn the
ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
With an automated manual transmission vehicle, confirm
that there is an “R” in the allshift indicator display.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle,
flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.
For emergencies
5. Take out the tyre sealant bottle and the compressor.
7. Take the valve cap (D) off the tyre valve (E).
NOTE
● In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 0 °C
or lower). Warm the bottle inside the vehicle.
6. Shake the tyre sealant bottle (C) well.
6
6-13
For emergencies
8. Unwind the bottle hose (F) from around the bottle (G).
6
6-14
9. Pull out the compressor’s hose (H) from the bottom of the
compressor and securely attach it to the valve (I) of the
bottle.
For emergencies
10. Install the bottle (J) onto the compressor (K).
11. Securely attach the bottle hose (F) to the tyre valve (N).
Remove the “max. 80 km/h (50 mph)” or “max. 50 mph”
label from the bottle; this must be displayed on the instrument panel in the driver’s field of view.
NOTE
● When installing the bottle, align the projection (L) on the
bottle with the indentation (M) in the compressor.
12. Insert the plug on the compressor’s power cord (O) into
the accessory socket (P), then turn the ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
6-15
6
For emergencies
13. Turn ON the compressor switch (Q) and inflate the tyre to
the specified pressure. Check and adjust the tyre pressure
with reference to the air pressure gauge (R) on the compressor (I). If you overinflate the tyre, release air by pressing the pressure release switch (S) on the compressor or
by loosening the hose’s end fitting. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-18.)
!
CAUTION
● Do not keep the compressor running continuously
for more than 6 minutes. Doing so could result in a
malfunction.
If the tyre pressure does not rise adequately, remove the
compressor from the tyre and carefully drive the vehicle
10 metres forwards or backwards to distribute the tyre
sealant around the tyre’s interior, then try inflating the tyre
again.
If there is a gap between the tyre and wheel because the
tyre has moved inward from the wheel rim, press the
periphery of the tyre towards the wheel to close the gap
before running the compressor. (With no gaps, the tyre
pressure will rise.)
6
6-16
For emergencies
!
CAUTION
● Be careful not to get your fingers trapped between
the tyre and wheel as the tyre inflates.
14. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then pull the power cord
plug out of the accessory socket.
NOTE
● The supplied compressor is designed only for inflation of
passenger vehicle tyres.
● The compressor is designed to run on a vehicle’s 12V
power supply. Do not connect it to any other power
source.
● The surface of the compressor will get hot while the compressor is running. Do not keep the compressor running
continuously for more than 6 minutes. After using the
compressor, wait for the compressor to cool before using
it again.
● If the tyre pressure does not rise to the necessary 1.8 bar
level within 5 minutes, the tyre may be too severely damaged for the tyre sealant to effect an emergency repair.
Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist in this event.
● Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre using the tyre
repair kit does not seal the puncture hole. Air will leak
through the puncture hole until the emergency repair procedure is completed (through step 17 of these instructions).
15. When you have inflated the tyre to the specified pressure,
stow the compressor and bottle in the vehicle and
promptly start driving the vehicle so that the tire sealant
can spread evenly in the tyre. Drive with great care. Do
not exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). Observe local
speed limits.
Remove the “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” label from
the bottle and display it on the instrument panel in the
driver’s field of view.
!
CAUTION
● If you sense any abnormality while driving, stop the
vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point or other specialist. Otherwise the tyre pressure may drop before the emergency repair procedure is completed, rendering the
vehicle unsafe.
NOTE
● Driving faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) can make the vehicle vibrate.
6-17
6
For emergencies
16. After driving for 10 minutes, check the tyre pressure using
the air pressure gauge on the compressor.
If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, inflate the tyre to the
specified pressure again and drive the vehicle carefully
without exceeding a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
!
CAUTION
● If the tyre pressure is lower than the minimum permitted pressure (1.3 bar {130 kPa}), the tyre cannot
successfully be repaired with the tyre sealant. Do not
drive the vehicle any further. Contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point
or other specialist.
6
6-18
17. After driving for 10 minutes, check the tyre pressure using
the air pressure gauge on the compressor. (Refer to “Tyre
inflation pressures” on page 8-18.) If the tyre pressure has
apparently not dropped, the emergency repair procedure is
complete. You must still not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). Observe local speed limits.
NOTE
● If the tyre pressure has dropped below the specified level
when you check it at the end of the repair procedure, do
not drive the vehicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or other specialist.
● In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 0 °C
or lower), the time and driving distance necessary until
completion of the repair can be longer than in warmer
conditions, meaning that the tyre pressure can drop below
the specified level even when you have inflated the tyre a
second time and subsequently driven the vehicle. If this
happens, inflate the tyre to the specified pressure once
more, drive for about 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles), then
check the tyre pressure again. If the tyre pressure has
again dropped below the specified level, stop driving the
vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or other specialist.
For emergencies
18. Then immediately drive with great care to a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or
other specialist and have the tyre repaired/replaced.
!
CAUTION
● Be sure to check the tyre pressure for confirmation
that the emergency repair procedure is complete.
● The manufacturer is unable to guarantee that all tyre punctures can be repaired with the tyre repair kit, in particular
cuts or perforations with a diameter of more than 4 mm or
away from the tyre’s tread. The manufacturer is not liable
for damage sustained through improper use of the tyre
repair kit.
● The manufacturer is not liable for damage sustained
through re-use of any tyre in which tyre sealant has been
used.
NOTE
● Please give the empty sealant bottle to your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point when you purchase
new sealant, or dispose of the sealant bottle according to
national regulations for the disposal of chemical waste.
● A tyre in which puncture sealant has been used should
ideally be replaced with a new one. If you wish to have
such a tyre properly repaired for reuse, please contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or
another specialist. Note that a proper repair is impossible
following an emergency repair if the puncture hole cannot
be located.
● Wipe away any sealant that gets on the wheel. Provided
the valve is replaced with a new one, the wheel can be
reused.
6
6-19
For emergencies
Jack*
3. Take out the jack from its designated position.
E00802000423
To remove
1. For vehicles with luggage floor lid, open the luggage floor
lid.
Refer to “Luggage floor lid” on page 5-71.
2. Lift the carpet, then remove the luggage floor boads (A).
6
6-20
For emergencies
To store
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its original position.
To expand
To retract
Jacking up the vehicle
E00801001218
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition
key to the “LOCK” position, move the gearshift lever to
the “R” (Reverse) position.
On vehicles with automated manual transmission, move
the allshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position, turn the
ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
With an automated manual transmission vehicle, confirm
that there is a “A” or “1” in the allshift indicator display.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle,
flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.
2. Return the luggage floor board to its original position.
6
6-21
For emergencies
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the
jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite from the tyre (B) you are changing.
!
6
WARNING
● Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tyre
when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves
while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position,
leading to an accident.
NOTE
● The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with
your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep ones in the
vehicle for use if needed.
● If chocks are not available, use stones or any other objects
that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.
6-22
6. Place the jack under one of the jacking points (C) shown
in the illustration. Use the jacking point closest to the tyre
you wish to change.
!
WARNING
● Set the jack only at the positions shown here. If the
jack is set at a wrong position, it could dent your
vehicle or the jack might fall over and cause personal injury.
● Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft surface.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause personal
injury. Always use the jack on a flat, hard surface.
Before setting the jack, make sure there are no sand
or pebbles under the jack base.
For emergencies
7. Holding the jack in position by hand, turn the handle until
the flange portion (D) fits in the groove (E) at the top of
the jack.
8. Slowly turn the jack handle until the tyre is raised slightly
off the ground surface.
!
WARNING
● Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the tyre is
raised off the ground. It is dangerous to raise the
vehicle any higher.
● Do not get under your vehicle while using the jack.
● Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it sitting on
the jack for a long time. Both are very dangerous.
● Do not use a jack except the one that came with your
vehicle.
● The jack should not be used for any purpose other
than to change a tyre.
● No one should be in your vehicle when using the
jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
on the jack.
● Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres still on the
ground could turn and make your vehicle fall off the
jack.
6-23
6
For emergencies
Spare wheel*
E00801101394
Check the air pressure of the spare tyre frequently and make
sure it is ready for emergency use at any time.
Maintaining the spare wheel at the highest specified air pressure will ensure that it can always be used under any conditions
(city/high-speed driving, varying load weight, etc.).
The spare wheel is stored beneath the luggage floor board of
the luggage compartment.
Compact spare wheel
The compact spare tyre is designed to save space in the luggage compartment and its lighter weight makes it easier to use
if a flat tyre occurs.
6
6-24
!
CAUTION
● The pressure should be periodically checked and
maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is
stowed.
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure can lead to
an accident. If you have no choice but to drive with
an insufficient tyre pressure, keep your speed down
and inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as soon as
possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on
page 8-18.)
● The compact spare wheel is for temporary use only
and should be removed as soon as the original wheel
can be repaired or replaced.
● The vehicle must not be driven at speeds in excess of
80 km/h (50 mph) while using the compact spare
wheel.
● The compact spare tyre is not as good as a standard
tyre in controllability and stability. When the compact spare tyre is used, avoid quick starts, sudden
braking and sharp steering.
● Avoid driving through automatic vehicle washers
and over obstacles that could possibly damage the
vehicle’s undercarriage. Because the compact spare
wheel is smaller than the original wheel, the ground
clearance is slightly reduced.
● The compact spare wheel is specifically designed for
your vehicle and it should not be used on any other
vehicle.
For emergencies
!
CAUTION
● Do not use tyre chain with your compact spare
wheel. Because of the smaller tyre size, a tyre chain
will not fit properly. This could cause damage to the
wheel and result in loss of the chain.
If a front tyre becomes flat when using tyre chains,
first replace a rear wheel with the compact spare
wheel and then use the removed rear wheel to
replace the flat front wheel so that you can continue
to use the chains.
!
CAUTION
● The compact spare tyre should not be used on any
other wheels, nor should standard tyres, snow tyres,
wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact
spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle components may occur.
● Upon installation of the compact spare tyre, the
overall vehicle height is slightly lowered as the tyre
is smaller in diameter than the standard tyre. When
passing over the projections on the road, use care
not to drive the vehicle with the same feeling as used
in driving with the standard tyre on.
● Do not install more than one compact spare wheel at
the same time.
● When the tread wear indicator do appear, the tyre
must be replaced.
Refer to “Wheel condition” on page 8-19.
6
6-25
For emergencies
To remove
1. For vehicles with luggage floor lid, open the luggage floor
cargo lid.
Refer to “Luggage floor lid” on page 5-71.
2. Lift the carpet, then remove the luggage floor boards (A).
3. Remove the clamp (B) which secures the spare wheel by
turning it anticlockwise. Take out the spare wheel.
To install
To install the spare wheel, tighten the clamp by turning it
clockwise until the spare wheel cannot move.
6
6-26
For emergencies
How to change a tyre
E00801202086
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a safe, flat
location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn the ignition
key to the “LOCK” position, move the gearshift lever to
the “R” (Reverse) position.
On vehicles with automated manual transmission, move
the allshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position, turn the
ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
With an automated manual transmission vehicle, confirm
that there is a “R” in the allshift indicator display.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a warning triangle,
flashing signal lamp, etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is raised on the
jack, place chocks or blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite from the tyre (B) you are changing.
!
WARNING
● Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the correct tyre
when jacking up the vehicle. If the vehicle moves
while jacked up, the jack could slip out of position,
leading to an accident.
NOTE
● The chocks shown in the illustration do not come with
your vehicle. It is recommended that you keep ones in the
vehicle for use if needed.
● If chocks are not available, use stones or any other objects
that are large enough to hold the wheel in position.
6-27
6
For emergencies
6. Get the spare wheel, jack, and wheel nut wrench ready.
7. On vehicles with wheel covers, first remove the covers
(refer to “Wheel covers” on page 6-33). Then loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
NOTE
● Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body near the jack.
This makes it safer if the jack slips out of position.
6
8. Find the closest jacking point to the flat tyre (refer to
“Jacking up the vehicle” on page 6-21). Then position the
jack and raise the vehicle until the tyre is slightly off the
ground.
9. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench, then
take the wheel off.
!
CAUTION
● Handle the wheel carefully when changing the tyre,
to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
6-28
For emergencies
10. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface (C), hub bolts
(D) or in the installation holes (E) in the wheel, and then
mount the spare tyre.
!
WARNING
● Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem (F) facing outboard. If you cannot see the valve stem (F),
you have installed the wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel installed
backwards can cause vehicle damage and result in
an accident.
6
6-29
For emergencies
11. Finger-tighten the wheel nuts. (Turn them clockwise.)
Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered parts of the wheel
nuts make light contact with the seats of the wheel holes
and the wheel is not loose.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the same way with a compact
spare wheel.
Vehicle with steel wheels
Wheel nuts without caps
6
6-30
Wheel nuts with caps
For emergencies
Vehicle with aluminium wheels
Normal wheels
!
CAUTION
● Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or the nuts
or they will tighten too much.
12. Lower the vehicle slowly and then tighten the nuts in the
order shown in the illustration until each nut has been
tightened to the torque listed here.
Tightening torque
98 to 118 N·m
(Achieved by applying the force of 440 to 520 N at the
end of the wheel nut wrench supplied with the vehicle)
Compact spare wheel
6
6-31
For emergencies
!
CAUTION
● Never use your foot or a pipe extension for extra
force in the wheel nut wrench. If you do so, you will
tighten the nut too much.
13. Lower and remove the jack, then store the jack, flat tyre,
and chock. Have your damaged tyre repaired as soon as
possible.
14. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The correct pressures
are shown on the door label. See the illustration.
6
6-32
!
CAUTION
● The tyre pressure should be periodically checked
and maintained at the specified pressure while the
tyre is stowed.
● The compact spare tyre is to be used only temporarily when the standard tyre is damaged. Repair the
damaged tyre as soon as possible and use it to
replace the compact spare tyre.
● After changing the tyre and driving the vehicle
about 1,000 km (620 miles), retighten the wheel nuts
to make sure that they have not come loose.
● If the steering wheel vibrates when driving after
changing the tyre, we recommend you to have the
tyres checked for balance.
● Do not mix one type of tyre with another or use a
different size from the one listed. This would cause
early wear and poor handling.
For emergencies
Wheel covers*
E00801300298
To remove
1. Wrap the tip of the wheel nut wrench (if so equipped) or
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a cloth, insert it
deeply behind a spoke of the wheel cover, and use it to
lever up the cover a little.
!
CAUTION
● Use the wheel nut wrench until the wheel cover
comes completely off. If you try to use your hands,
they may be hurt by the edge of the wheel cover.
To install
1. Align the air valve (A) of the tyre with the notch (B) in the
wheel cover.
2. With the cover raised a little, pry it off completely using
the wheel nut wrench. Insert the wheel nut wrench under
the cover, and move it around the circumference, prying
the cover away from the wheel little by little as you move
the wheel nut wrench around.
NOTE
● The wheel cover is made of plastic; take care when prying
it off.
6
NOTE
● Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (C) provided on
the reverse side to show the air valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the wheel, make sure
that the opening with the symbol mark is correctly aligned
with the air valve.
6-33
For emergencies
2. Press the bottom part (D) of the wheel cover onto the
wheel.
3. Gently press both sides (E) of the wheel cover and hold
them in place with your knees.
4. Gently tap around the circumference of the wheel cover at
the top (F), then press the wheel cover into place.
Towing
E00801502425
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a
commercial tow truck service.
In the following case, transport the vehicle using a tow truck.
● The engine runs but the vehicle does not move or abnormal noise is produced.
● Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals that oil or
some other fluid is leaking.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow the vehicle.
Please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
6
NOTE
● Before installing the wheel cover, make sure the tabs on
the back are correctly fitted on the rings. If the tabs are not
correctly fitted on the rings, the wheel cover may come
off. If the tabs are broken, do not install the wheel cover.
6-34
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “Emergency towing” in this
part.
The regulations concerning towing may differ from country to
country. It is recommended that you obey the regulations of the
area where you are driving your vehicle.
For emergencies
Towing the vehicle by a tow truck
!
CAUTION
● This vehicle must not be towed by a tow truck using
sling lift type equipment (Type A) as illustrated.
Using a sling lift will damage the bumper and front
end.
● If the transmission is malfunctioning or damaged,
transport the vehicle with the driving wheels on a
carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.
● If your vehicle has an automated manual transmission, place the allshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
position before stopping the engine.
● [For vehicles with the traction control system
(TCL)/active stability control system (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position and only the front wheels or only the
rear wheels raised off the ground, the traction control system (TCL) may operate, resulting in an accident.
6
6-35
For emergencies
Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B)
Place the gearshift lever (manual transmission) or the allshift
lever (automated manual transmission) in the “N” (Neutral)
position. With a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission, confirm that the transmission is in the “N” (Neutral)
position by checking that “N” is shown by the allshift indicator
display and by pushing the vehicle.
Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position and secure the
steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or tiedown strap. Never place the ignition key in the “LOCK” position when towing.
If, with a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission,
the engine will not start and the transmission is not in the “N”
(Neutral) position, press the brake pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position, and move the allshift lever to the
“N” (Neutral) position.
Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C)
6
Release the parking brake.
Place the gearshift lever (manual transmission) or the allshift
lever (automated manual transmission) in the “N” (Neutral)
position. With a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission, confirm that the transmission is in the “N” (Neutral)
position by checking that “N” is shown by the allshift indicator
display and by pushing the vehicle.
If, with a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission,
the engine will not start and the transmission is not in the “N”
(Neutral) position, press the brake pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position, and move the allshift lever to the
“N” (Neutral) position.
6-36
Emergency towing
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle
may be temporarily towed by a rope secured to the towing
hook.
In case of your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle or
your vehicle tows another vehicle, pay careful attention to the
following points.
!
CAUTION
● If your vehicle has an automated manual transmission, place the allshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
position before stopping the engine.
For emergencies
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle
1. Take out the towing hook and wheel nut wrench (if so
equipped). (Refer to “Tools, jack and tyre repair kit” on
page 6-9.)
2. Press by hand the side of the cover (A) that has a “ ”
mark, then remove the cover.
3. Use the wheel nut wrench (B) to securely mount the towing hook (C).
If your vehicle does not have a wheel nut wrench,
securely tighten the towing hook (C) by hand.
6
6-37
For emergencies
4. Secure the tow rope to the front towing hook.
!
CAUTION
● Do not tow the vehicle with the rope at an excessive
diagonal angle.
NOTE
● To avoid deforming or otherwise damaging the vehicle
body when hooking the rope onto the towing hook,
observe the following instructions:
• Mount the towing hook securely.
• Do not attach the rope to any part of the vehicle other
than the towing hook.
• Do not drive in a way that subjects the towing hook to
significant physical shock.
5. Keep the engine running.
If the engine is not running, turn the ignition key to the
“ACC” or “ON” position to unlock the steering wheel.
6
!
CAUTION
● When the engine is not running, the brake booster
and power steering do not operate. This means
higher brake depression force and higher steering
effort are required. Therefore, vehicle operation is
more difficult than usual.
● Do not leave the key in the “LOCK” position. The
steering wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
6-38
6. Place the gearshift lever (manual transmission) or the
allshift lever (automated manual transmission) in the “N”
(Neutral) position.
With a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission, confirm that the transmission is in the “N” (Neutral)
position by checking that “N” is shown by the allshift
indicator display and by pushing the vehicle.
If, with a vehicle that has an automated manual transmission, the engine will not start and the transmission is not
in the “N” (Neutral) position, press the brake pedal, turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position, and move the
allshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position.
7. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required by law.
(Follow the local driving laws and regulations.)
For emergencies
8. During towing make sure that close contact is maintained
between the drivers of both vehicles, and that the vehicles
travel at low speed.
!
WARNING
● To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the towing
vehicle, set your air selection switch to the recirculation position.
!
9. When towing is finished, remove the towing hook and
store it in the specified location. (Refer to “Tools, jack and
tyre repair kit” on page 6-9.)
When installing the cover on the bumper, align the tab (D)
with the hole in the vehicle body and press the cover
securely into place.
CAUTION
● The person in the vehicle being towed must pay
attention to the brake lamps of the towing vehicle
and make sure the rope never becomes slack.
● Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and
sharp turning; such operation could cause damage
to the towing hooks or the tow rope.
People in the vicinity could be injured as a result.
● When towing or being towed down a long slope, the
brakes may overheat reducing the effectiveness. In
this situation, have your vehicle transported by a
tow truck.
6
6-39
For emergencies
If your vehicle tows another vehicle
The rear towing hook (A) is located as shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing hook.
NOTE
● Using any part other than the designated towing hook (A)
could result in damage to vehicle body.
6
6-40
NOTE
● Your vehicle should only be used to tow another vehicle if
the weight of the other vehicle is less than your vehicle.
!
WARNING
● Do not use the rear towing hook as a jacking point.
For emergencies
Operation under adverse driving conditions
E00801701840
If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or
snow
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often
be moved by a rocking motion. For vehicle with manual transmission, move the gearshift lever alternately between 1st and
Reverse, while applying slight pressure to the accelerator
pedal.
With an automated manual transmission vehicle, place the
allshift lever in the “A” (automatic mode) position to select
automatic mode or select 1st or 2nd gear in the manual mode or
place the allshift lever in the “R” (Reverse) position for
reverse. Confirm that there is an “A”, “1”, “2” or “R” in the
allshift indicator display, then gently press the accelerator
pedal. Do not press the accelerator pedal while moving the
allshift lever.
Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and
transmission failure. Allow the engine to idle for a few minutes
to let the transmission cool between rocking attempts.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, seek
other assistance.
!
WARNING
● When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck
position, be sure that the area around the vehicle is
clear of people and physical objects. The rocking
motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly launch
forward or backward, causing injury or damage to
nearby people or objects.
6
6-41
For emergencies
On a flooded road
● Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the brake discs,
resulting in temporarily ineffective brakes. In such cases,
lightly depress the brake pedal to see if the brakes operate
properly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedal several
times while driving in order to dry the brake pads.
● When driving in rain or on a road with many puddles a
layer of water may form between the tyres and the road
surface.
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on the road,
resulting in loss of steering stability and braking capability.
To cope with this, observe the following items:
(a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed.
(b) Do not drive on worn tyres. Always maintain the
specified tyre inflation pressures.
On a snow-covered or frozen road
● When driving on a snow-covered or frozen road, it is recommended that you use snow tyres or tyre chains.
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains” sections.
● Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceleration, abrupt
brake application and sharp cornering.
● Depressing the brake pedal during travel on snowy or icy
roads may cause tyre slippage and skidding. When traction between the tyres and the road is reduced the wheels
may skid and the vehicle cannot readily be brought to a
stop by conventional braking techniques. Braking will differ, depending upon whether you have anti-lock brake
system (ABS). As your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
brake system (ABS), brake by pressing the brake pedal
hard, and keeping it pressed.
● Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy or rutted
roads.
6
!
CAUTION
● The impact on tyres and/or wheels when driving on
a bumpy or rutted road can damage the tyre and/or
the wheel.
6-42
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Cleaning the interior of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .7Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . .7-
2
3
4
7
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions
E00900100665
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is necessary to
perform regular maintenance using the proper procedures.
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance with any environmental pollution control regulations. Carefully select the materials used for washing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If in doubt, we recommend that you consult a specialist for selection of these materials.
7
7-2
!
CAUTION
● Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some are poisonous. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or drop them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in an
enclosed space. When you use anything in a container to clean your vehicle, always follow the
instructions and always open your vehicle doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use
the following to clean your vehicle:
• Petrol
• Paint Thinner
• Benzine
• Kerosene
• Turpentine
• Naphtha
• Lacquer Thinner
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Nail Polish Remover
• Acetone
● These are all dangerous, and can damage your vehicle.
Vehicle care
Cleaning the interior of your vehicle
E00900200347
After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with water, cleaner
or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area.
!
CAUTION
● Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine,
kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or alkaline or acidic
solutions.
These chemicals can cause discolouring, staining or
cracking of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.
Upholstery
E00900500135
1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, handle the
upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean.
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If
stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with
an appropriate cleaner, and cloth fabrics can be cleaned
with either upholstery cleaner or a 3% solution of neutral
detergent in lukewarm water.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove
any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be
removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast cloth
and stain remover.
NOTE
● Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts
E00900300045
1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft cloth soaked with
a 3% aqueous solution of neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well. Using this
cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
7
NOTE
● Do not use cleaners, conditioners and protectants containing silicons or wax.
Such products may cause annoying reflections and
obscure vision.
7-3
Vehicle care
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
Genuine leather*
E00900600569
1. Lightly wipe off with gauze or other soft cloth soaked
with a 5 % aqueous solution of neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out well. Using this
cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine leather surface.
NOTE
7
● If genuine leather is wet with water or is washed in water,
wipe off water as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth.
If left damp, mildew may grow.
● The genuine leather surface may be damaged if a nylon
brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed hard against it.
● Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol and
petrol, acid or alkaline solvents may discolour the genuine
leather surface. Be sure to use neutral detergents.
● Remove dirty patches or oil substances quickly as they
can stain genuine leather.
● The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is
exposed to direct sun for long hours. When your vehicle is
parked, place it in the shade as much as possible.
● When the temperature of the vehicle interior rises in summer, vinyl products left on the genuine leather seat may
deteriorate and stick to the seat.
E00900700010
If the following is left on your vehicle, it may cause corrosion,
discolouration and stains, wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
● Seawater, anti-freeze for road use.
● Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar, etc.).
● Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, tree sap, etc.
Washing
E00900901657
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from the
road surface can damage the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your
vehicle from this damage. This will also be effective in protecting it from environmental elements such as rain, snow, salt air,
etc.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in
the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using
an ample amount of clean water and a car washing brush or
sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly
and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bonnet, etc.,
where dirt is likely to remain.
!
CAUTION
● When washing the under side of your vehicle or
wheel, be careful not to injure your hands.
7-4
Vehicle care
!
CAUTION
● If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place the
wiper switch lever in the “ ” (OFF) position to
deactivate the rain sensor before washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate in the presence of water spray on the windscreen and may get
damaged as a result.
● Refrain from using a car wash as its brushes may
scratch the paint surface, causing it to lose its gloss.
Scratches will be especially visible on darker coloured vehicles.
● Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the engine compartment, as this may
adversely affect engine starting.
Exercise caution also when washing the underbody;
be careful not to spray water into the engine compartment.
● Some types of hot water washing equipment apply
high pressure and heat to the vehicle. This may
cause heat distortion and damage to the vehicle resin
parts and result in flooding of the vehicle interior.
Therefore; observe the following.
• Maintain a good distance of approx. 50 cm or more
between the vehicle body and the washing nozzle.
• When washing around the door glass, hold the
nozzle at a distance of more than 50 cm and at
right angles to the glass surface.
!
CAUTION
● After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle slowly
while lightly depressing the brake pedal several
times in order to dry out the brakes.
Leaving the brakes wet could result in reduced
braking performance. Also, there is a possibility that
they could freeze up or become inoperative due to
rust, rendering the vehicle unable to move.
● Using an automatic car wash, pay attention to the
following items, referring to the operation manual
or consulting a car wash operator. If the following
procedure is not followed, it could result in damage
to your vehicle.
• The outside rear-view mirrors are retracted.
• The antenna is removed.
• The rear wiper arm assembly is taped or removed.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear spoiler, consult a car wash operator before using the car wash.
• If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place the
wiper switch lever in the “ ” (OFF) position to
deactivate the rain sensor.
7
7-5
Vehicle care
During cold weather
Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in some areas in
winter can have a damaging effect on the vehicle body. You
should therefore wash the vehicle as often as possible in
accordance with our care instructions. It is recommended that
you have a preservative applied and the underfloor protection
checked before and after the cold weather season.
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the
rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
● To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors,
bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone spray.
Waxing
E00901000717
Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence of dust and
road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply a wax solution after
washing the vehicle, or at least once every three months to
assist water displacement.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax
after the surfaces have cooled.
!
CAUTION
● Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should
not be used. Such waxes effectively remove rust and
stain from the paintwork but they are harmful to the
lustre on the painted surface and the plated surface.
Further, they are harmful to glossy surfaces such as
grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.
7-6
CAUTION
Polishing
E00901100011
NOTE
7
!
● Do not use petrol or paint thinners to remove road
tar or other contamination to the vehicle surface.
● Do not apply wax on areas with a black mat coating
as it can cause uneven discolouration, patches, blurs,
etc. If stained with wax, immediately wipe off with a
piece of soft cloth and warm water.
The vehicle should only be polished if the paintwork has
become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-finish parts and plastic
bumpers must not be polished, polishing these parts will stain
them or damage their finish.
Damaged paint
E00901200012
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched
up as soon as possible with MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to
prevent corrosion.
Check body areas facing the road or the tyres carefully for
damage to the paint coat caused by flying stones, etc. The paint
code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
information code plate in the engine compartment.
Vehicle care
Cleaning plastic parts
Aluminium wheels*
E00901300550
E00901500086
Use a sponge or chamois leather.
If car wax adheres to a rough grey or black surface on the
bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface will become white. In
such cases, wipe it off using lukewarm water and a soft cloth or
chamois leather.
1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling water on the
wheel.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot be removed
easily with water.
Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing the wheel.
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft
cloth.
!
CAUTION
● Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard tools as
they may damage the plastic part of the surface.
● Do not use wax containing compound (polishing
powder) which may damage the plastic part of the
surface.
● Do not bring plastic parts into contact with petrol,
light oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which
may crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts.
If these substances touch a plastic part, wipe them
off with a soft cloth, chamois or similar and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent, then immediately
rinse the affected parts with water.
!
CAUTION
● Do not use a brush or other hard implement on the
wheels.
Doing so could scratch the wheels.
● Do not use any cleaner that contains an abrasive
substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could
cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become
discoloured or stained.
● Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means.
● Contact with seawater and road deicer can cause
corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible.
Chrome parts
7
E00901400014
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome parts, wash
with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a special protective coating. This should be done more frequently in winter.
7-7
Vehicle care
Window glass
Engine compartment
E00901600104
E00902100265
The window glass can normally be cleaned using only a
sponge and water.
Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, dead insects,
etc. After washing the glass, wipe dry with a clean, dry, soft
cloth. Never use the same cloth to wipe the window glass as
would be used to wipe the paintwork; wax from the painted
surfaces could adhere to the glass and reduce its transparency
and visibility.
Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and end of
winter. Pay particular attention to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts where dust containing road chemicals and other corrosive materials might collect.
If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in your area,
clean the engine compartment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the
engine compartment, as this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and so on into
contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the
like and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.
!
CAUTION
● If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place the
wiper switch lever in the “ ” (OFF) position to
deactivate the rain sensor before washing the windscreen. Otherwise, the wipers will operate in the
presence of water spray on the windscreen and may
get damaged as a result.
NOTE
● To clean the inside of the tailgate window, always use a
soft cloth and wipe the window glass along the demister
heater element so as not to cause damage.
7
Wiper blades
E00901700017
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead
insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace the wiper blades
when they no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page 8-25.)
7-8
Maintenance
Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Brake fluid/Clutch fluid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Tyres. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Clutch pedal free play* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Brake pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Parking brake lever stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8For cold and snow weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Fuse links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Replacement of lamp bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-
2
3
4
6
10
12
13
14
18
23
24
24
25
28
29
30
30
40
8
Maintenance
Service precautions
E01000100458
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals serves to preserve the value and appearance as long as possible.
Maintenance items as described in this owner’s manual can be
performed by the owner.
We recommend you to have the periodic inspection and maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist. In the event a malfunction
or other problem is discovered, we recommend you to have it
checked and repaired. This section contains information on
inspection maintenance procedures that you can do yourself.
Follow the instructions and cautions for each of the various
procedures.
!
8
WARNING
● When checking or servicing the inside of the engine
compartment, make sure the engine is switched off
and has had a chance to cool down.
● If it is necessary to do work in the engine compartment with the engine running, be especially careful
that your clothing, hair, etc., does not become caught
by the fan, drive belts, or other moving parts.
● The fan may turn on automatically even if the
engine is not running; turn the ignition key to
“LOCK” position and remove the key to ensure
safety while you work in the engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or battery. The fumes are flammable.
8-2
!
WARNING
● Be extremely cautious when working around the
battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulphuric acid.
● Do not get under your vehicle with just the body
jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack
stands.
● Improper handling of components and materials
used in the vehicle can endanger your personal
safety. We recommend you to consult a specialist for
necessary information.
Maintenance
Catalytic converter
E01000200996
For ordinary use, there are no particular precautions except that
of using unleaded petrol.
The exhaust gas scavenging device used with the catalytic converter is extremely efficient for the reduction of noxious gases.
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system.
It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
!
CAUTION
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in a proper operating condition.
In the event of an engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfiring or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle in a severely
overheated condition may result in possible damage
to the converter and vehicle.
!
WARNING
● As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this
vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as
dry grass or leaves can come into contact with a hot
exhaust, since fire could result.
● Paint should not be applied to the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter itself gets hot quickly, and may be damaged if overheated. The following points should be noted in
order to prevent the igniting of unburned petrol within the catalytic converter.
● Use UNLEADED PETROL ONLY of the type recommended in “Fuel selection” on page 2.
● Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out
of fuel could cause damage to the catalytic converter.
● Do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle. If the
battery is weak or discharged, use another battery to start
the engine.
● Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as performing diagnostic tests.
● Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very
rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
● Do not race the engine when turning off the ignition
switch. This will cause the catalytic converter to be damaged due to contact with unburnt fuel.
● Stop driving the vehicle if you think the performance is
noticeably low, or the engine has a malfunction such as
with the ignition, etc.
If it is impractical to stop driving immediately, reduce the
speed and drive for only a short time. We recommend that
you have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
● In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a burnt smell may indicate severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating.
If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped in a safe
place, the engine switched off and the vehicle allowed to
cool. Once the engine is cool, a service, including a tuneup to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained
immediately.
8-3
8
Maintenance
Bonnet
Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety lock.
E01000301721
To open
Pull the release lever towards you to unlock the bonnet.
8
8-4
NOTE
● Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in the parked
position. Failure to do so may cause paint/body damage.
Maintenance
Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar in its slot.
To close
Unlatch the support bar (A) and clip it in its holder.
Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about 30 cm above the
closed position, then let it drop.
!
CAUTION
● Note that the support bar may disengage the bonnet
if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong wind.
● Always insert the support bar into the hole provided
specifically for this purpose. Supporting the bonnet
at any other location could result in the support bar
slipping out and lead to an accident.
NOTE
● If this does not close the bonnet, release it from a slightly
higher position.
● Do not press the bonnet down hard by hand as it may
damage the bonnet.
● Push the support bar (A) down completely into its holder.
8
8-5
Maintenance
Engine oil
E01000401807
To check and refill engine oil
!
CAUTION
● Be careful that hands or fingers are not trapped
when closing the bonnet.
● Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is securely
locked. An incompletely locked bonnet can suddenly
open while driving. This can be extremely dangerous.
The engine oil used has a significant effect on the engine’s performance, service life and startability. Be sure to use oil of the
recommended quality and appropriate viscosity.
All engines consume a certain amount of oil during normal
operation, and engine oil consumption is greatly influenced by
payload, engine speed, etc. Therefore, it is important to check
the oil level at regular intervals or before starting a long trip.
This check must be made with the engine warm but not running. Park the vehicle on a level surface, stop the engine, and
then wait a few moments to allow the engine oil in circulation
to return to the oil pan to ensure accurate measurement.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert
the dipstick as far as it goes. Remove the dipstick and read the
oil level, which should always be within the range indicated.
If the oil level is below the specified limit, remove the cap
located on the cylinder head cover and add enough oil to raise
the level to within the specified range.
Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do not mix various
types of oil. Also, avoid mixing different makes of oil together
if possible.
After adding oil, close the cap securely.
Use only the recommended oils with an MB classification as
specified in this manual.
8
8-6
Maintenance
1100 models
1300/1500 models
1500 models with turbocharger
NOTE
● The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the vehicle is
subjected to severe conditions (for example, repeated
operation on rough roads, in mountainous regions, on
roads with many uphill and downhill gradients, or over
short distances). Consequently, the oil will require earlier
replacement.
● For handling of used engine oils, refer to page 8.
8
8-7
Maintenance
Selection of engine oil
(Except for Clear Tec & Clear Tec FFV)
Vehicles with turbocharger
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
● Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity number
according to the atmospheric temperature.
● Use engine oil conforming to the following classification:
• “MB 229.1” or higher
NOTE
8
● Use of additives is not recommended since they may
reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in
the engine oil. It may result in failure of the mechanical
assembly.
8-8
● Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity number
according to the atmospheric temperature.
● Use engine oil conforming to the following classification:
• API classification: “For service SG” or higher
• ILSAC certificated oil
• ACEA classification:
“For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5”
Maintenance
NOTE
● Use of additives is not recommended since they may
reduce the effectiveness of additives already included in
the engine oil. It may result in failure of the mechanical
assembly.
● SAE 5W-30 engine oil can be used to improve engine
startability in very cold weather areas where the lowest
atmospheric temperature is below the range shown in the
illustration.
In this case, use engine oil conforming to the following
classification:
• ACEA classification:
“For service A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5”
• API classification:
“For service SG” or higher
Selection of engine oil
(Clear Tec & Clear Tec FFV)
● Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity number
according to the atmospheric temperature.
● SAE 0W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30, and 5W-40 engine oils can
only be used if they meet ACEA A3/B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5
and API SG (or higher) specifications.
● Use engine oil conforming to the following classification:
• API classification: “For service SG” or higher
• ILSAC certificated oil
• ACEA classification:
“For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, or A5/B5”
8-9
8
Maintenance
Engine coolant
Vehicles with turbocharger
E01000501390
To check the coolant level
A translucent coolant reserve tank is located in the engine compartment.
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the
“LOW” and “FULL” marks when measured while the engine is
cold.
Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. The reserve tank lid
is equipped with a dipstick.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth. Reinsert
the dipstick as far as it goes. Remove the dipstick and read the
coolant level, which should always be within the range “F”
(FULL) or “L” (LOW) while the engine is cold.
FULL
FULL
LOW
8
8-10
LOW
Maintenance
To add coolant
Anti-freeze
The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of
coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant
level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you
to have the system checked as soon as possible.
The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion
agent. The cylinder head and water pump housing are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic changing of the engine coolant is
necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts.
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on the reserve
tank, open the lid and add coolant to “FULL” level.
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, remove the radiator cap (A) and add coolant until the level reaches the filler
neck.
Use High-quality ethylene glycol based coolant. It has excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation of all metals including aluminium and can avoid blockages in the
radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain water even in summer. The
required concentration of anti-freeze differs depending on the
expected ambient temperature.
!
WARNING
● Do not open the radiator cap while the engine is hot.
The coolant system is under pressure and any hot
coolant escaping could cause severe burns.
Vehicles with turbocharger
If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW) level on the dipstick, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, remove the radiator cap (A) and add coolant until the level reaches the filler
neck.
!
Ambient temperature
(minimum) °C
-30
-35
-50
Anti-freeze
concentration %
45
50
60
WARNING
● Do not open the radiator cap while the engine is hot.
The coolant system is under pressure and any hot
coolant escaping could cause severe burns.
8
8-11
Maintenance
!
● Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or any
engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol
anti-freeze. The use of an improper anti-freeze can
cause corrosion of the aluminium components.
● For effective anti-corrosion and anti-freeze performance, keep the anti-freeze concentration within
the range of 45 to 60%.
Concentrations exceeding 60% will result in a
reduction of both the anti-freeze and cooling performance thus adversely affecting the engine.
● Do not top up with water only.
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling
system if it should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it
can cause corrosion and rust formation.
During cold weather
8
If the temperatures in your area drop below freezing, there is
the danger that the coolant in the engine or radiator could
freeze and cause severe damage to the engine and/or radiator.
Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze to the coolant to prevent
it from freezing.
The concentration should be checked before the start of cold
weather and anti-freeze added to the system if necessary.
8-12
Washer fluid
CAUTION
E01000700702
Check the washer fluid level in the container.
If the level is low, replenish the container with washer fluid.
NOTE
● The washer fluid container serves the windscreen and rear
window.
During cold weather
To ensure proper operation of the washers at low temperatures,
use a fluid containing an anti-freezing agent.
Maintenance
Brake fluid/Clutch fluid*
E01000800035
The brake fluid (A) and the clutch fluid (B) share a reservoir
tank.
To check the fluid level
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when doing
other work under the bonnet. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short period of time, it indicates a leak from the system.
If this occurs, we recommend that you have the vehicle
checked.
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT4+from a sealed container.
The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the brake
fluid will adversely affect the brake system and the clutch system, reducing performance.
!
A- Brake fluid
B- Clutch fluid
C- Partition
The fluid level must be between the “MAX” and “MIN” marks
on the reservoir.
The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When the fluid
level falls below the “MIN” mark, the brake fluid warning
lamp lights up.
The brake fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads,
but this does not indicate any abnormality.
CAUTION
● Take care when handling brake fluid as it is harmful
to the eyes, may irritate your skin and also damage
painted surfaces.
● Use only the specified brake fluid.
To prevent a chemical reaction do not mix or add
different brands of brake fluid.
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix
with, or get into the brake fluid.
This will damage the seals.
● Keep the reservoir tank cap closed, except during
maintenance, to prevent the brake fluid from deteriorating.
● Clean the filler cap before removing and close the
cap securely after maintenance.
8-13
8
Maintenance
Battery
Checking battery electrolyte level
E01001201655
The condition of the battery is very important for quick starting
of the engine and proper functioning of the vehicle’s electrical
system. Regular inspection and care are especially important in
cold weather.
NOTE
● Memory data for settings made by the user may be erased
when the battery is replaced. If this happens, establish the
settings again using the relevant procedures.
8
8-14
The inside of the battery is divided into several compartments.
Checking the electrolyte level in each cell after removing the
cap.
Maintenance
If the part marked (A) inside each cell is below the surface of
the electrolyte (B), the electrolyte level is normal. Top up the
electrolyte with distilled water if necessary. Do not add overfill
the cell; spillage during driving could cause damage.
During cold weather
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low temperatures. This
is an inevitable result of its chemical and physical properties.
This is why a very cold battery, particularly one that is not fully
charged anyway, will only deliver a fraction of the starter current which is normally available.
We recommend you to have the battery checked before the start
of cold weather and, if necessary, have it charged or replaced.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a battery which
is kept fully charged also has a longer life.
Disconnection and connection
!
CAUTION
● Do not disconnect the battery terminals for at least
one minute after the ignition switch is turned
“OFF”. If the battery terminals are disconnected
immediately after the ignition switch is turned
“OFF”, the automated manual transmission may be
damaged.
Check the electrolyte level at least once every four weeks,
depending on the operating conditions.
If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself with time.
Check it once every four weeks and charge with low current as
necessary.
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine, first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and then the positive (+) terminal.
When connecting the battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal.
8
8-15
Maintenance
NOTE
● Open the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the battery.
● Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the battery cable
from the positive (+) terminal.
8
8-16
!
WARNING
● Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the
battery because the battery could explode.
● The battery electrolyte is extremely caustic. Do not
allow it to come in contact with your eyes, skin,
clothing, or the painted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt
electrolyte should be flushed immediately with
ample amounts of water.
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact with electrolyte requires immediate medical attention.
● Ventilate when charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space.
Maintenance
!
CAUTION
● Never disconnect the battery with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position; doing so could damage
the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Never short-circuit the battery; doing so could cause
it to overheat and be damaged.
● Always wear protective eye goggles when working
near the battery.
● If the battery is to be quick-charged, first disconnect
the battery cables.
● In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.
● Keep it out of reach of children.
● Do not bring the nearby part, the plastic parts and
so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral
detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts
with plenty of water.
NOTE
● Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is connected,
apply terminal protection grease. To clean the terminals,
use lukewarm water.
● Check to see if the battery is securely installed and cannot
be moved during travel. Also check each terminal for
tightness.
● When the vehicle is to be left unused for a long period of
time, remove the battery and store it in a place where the
battery fluid will not freeze. The battery should be stored
only in a fully charged condition.
8
8-17
Maintenance
Tyres
E01001300226
!
WARNING
● Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged or
improperly inflated can lead to a loss of control or
blow out of the tyres which can result in a collision
with serious or fatal injury.
Tyre inflation pressures
E01001402032
Item
Tyre size
Normal tyre
Normal
At trailer towing
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
175/65R14 82T
195/50R15 82H
205/45R16 83H
2.2 bar (220 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.2 bar (220 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.2 bar (220 kPa)
2.5 bar (250 kPa)
205/45R16 83V
2.4 bar (240 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.4 bar (240 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.4 bar (240 kPa)
2.5 bar (250 kPa)
Special low rolling
resistance tyre
175/65R14 82T
185/55R15 82H
2.4 bar (240 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.4 bar (240 kPa),
2.5 bar (250 kPa)*
2.4 bar (240 kPa)
2.5 bar (250 kPa)
Compact spare tyre
T115/70D15
4.2 bar (420 kPa)
—
*: Above 160 km/h (99 mph)
8
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
8-18
Maintenance
Wheel condition
E01001800407
Check that the wheel nuts are tightened correctly. Refer to the
section entitled “For emergencies” for information concerning
replacement of the tyres.
NOTE
● The mark and the location of the tyre tread wear indicators
are different depending on the tyre manufacturer.
Replacing tyres and wheels
E01007200038
!
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
2- Tread wear indicator
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage. Replace the
tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for
pieces of metal or pebbles.
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous because of the
greater chance of skidding or hydroplaning. The tread depth of
the tyres must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the
minimum requirement for use.
If there are tread wear indicators on the tyres, they will appear
in six places on the surface of the tyre as the tyre wears,
thereby indicating that the tyre no longer meets the minimum
requirement for use. When these wear indicators appear, the
tyres must be replaced with new ones.
CAUTION
● Avoid using different size tyres from the one listed
and the combined use of different types of tyres, as
this can affect driving safety.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 9-14.
● Even if a wheel has the same rim size and offset as
the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it
from being fitted correctly. We recommend you to
consult a specialist before using wheels that you
have.
8
8-19
Maintenance
Tyre rotation
E01001900121
Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road surface conditions and individual driver’s driving habits. To equalize the
wear and help extend tyre life, it is recommended to rotate the
tyres immediately after discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear difference between the front and rear tyres is recognizable.
When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and damage.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tyre pressure,
improper wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or severe
braking. We recommend you to have it checked to determine
the cause of irregular tread wear.
Tyres that do not have arrows showing rotation direction
Front
Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction
Front
!
CAUTION
● A compact spare tyre can be fitted temporarily in
place of a tyre that has been removed during the
tyre rotation. However, it must not be included in
the regular tyre rotation sequence.
8
8-20
Maintenance
!
CAUTION
● If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the correct
direction of rotation, swap the front and rear wheels
on the left hand side of the vehicle and the front and
rear wheels on the right hand side of the vehicle separately. Keep each tyre on its original side of the
vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure the
arrows point in the direction in which the wheels
will turn when the vehicle moves forward. Any tyre
whose arrow points in the wrong direction will not
perform to its full potential.
Front
Snow tyres
E01002000549
The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving on snow and
ice. To preserve driving stability, mount snow tyres of the same
size and tread pattern on all four wheels.
Snow tyres worn more than 50% are no longer suitable for use
as snow tyres.
Snow tyres which do not meet the specifications must not be
used.
!
CAUTION
● Observe the permissible maximum speed for your
snow tyres and the legal speed limit.
NOTE
● The laws and regulations concerning snow tyres (driving
speed, required use, type, etc.) vary. Find out and comply
with the laws and regulations in the area you intend to
drive in.
● If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, change to tapered
nuts when steel wheels are used.
Tyre chains
E01002101491
!
CAUTION
● Avoid the combined use of different types of tyres.
This can affect driving safety.
If tyre chains have to be used, ensure that they are fitted only
on the drive wheels (front).
Use only tyre chains which are designed for use with the tyres
mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect size or type of
chain could result in damage to the vehicle body.
Before fitting tyre chains, we recommend you to consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. The Max.
chain height is as follows.
8-21
8
Maintenance
Item
Tyre size
1 2
Except for 175/65R14* , *
Clear Tec
185/55R15*3
Clear Tec
Wheel size
Max. chain
height [mm]
!
15x6.0 J
● DO NOT use a jack when fitting the chains, as in the
conditions, the tyres may slip on the icy road causing
the vehicle to slip off the jack.
175/65R14
14x5.5 J
185/55R15
15x6.0 J
8
CAUTION
12
● For vehicle with 195/50R15 or 205/45R16 tyres,
chains should not be used. The clearance between
the chains and the body is small, and the body might
be damaged.
However, if chains must be used on vehicles with
195/50R15 or 205/45R16 tyres, because of the
adverse road conditions such as snow or ice, proceed
as follows:
Change all the original tyres (including wheels) to
175/65R14 tyres (14 x 5.5 J wheels) or 185/55R15 M
+ S tyres (15 x 6.0 J wheels) and then use the chains
on front wheels.
8-22
WARNING
14x5.5 J
*1: Vehicles with turbocharger have 15-inch brakes, so 14-inch
tyres and wheels cannot be used on them.
*2: Use only 175/65R14 snow tyres (M + S) with the 1500 models of the vehicles without turbocharger.
3 Snow tyres (M + S) only
*:
!
The speed limit for tyre chains is 50 km/h (31 mph). Remove
the tyre chains as soon as possible on snow free roads.
!
CAUTION
● Practice fitting the chains before you need them.
Don’t expect help from other people in the cold.
● Choose a clear straight stretch of road where you
can pull off and still be seen while you are fitting the
chains.
● Do not fit chains before you need them. This will
wear out your tyres and the road surface.
● After driving around 100-300 metres, stop and
retighten the chains.
● Care should be taken with extremes of steering lock
to prevent possible contact between the chains and
the vehicle body.
● Drive carefully and do not exceed 50 km/h (31 mph).
Remember, fitting chains is not going to stop accidents from happening.
● When tyre chains are installed, take care that they
do not damage the disc wheel or body.
Maintenance
!
CAUTION
● Do not install a tyre chain on an emergency wheel
which is compact in size. If one of the front wheels
has punctured, replace it with one of the rear wheels
and install the compact spare wheel in that place
before fitting a tyre chain.
● An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a tyre
chain while driving. When fitting a tyre chain on an
aluminium wheel, take care that any part of the
chain and fitting cannot be brought into contact
with the wheel.
● Remove the wheel covers before installing a tyre
chain, otherwise they may be damaged by the tyre
chain. (Refer to “Wheel covers” on page 6-33.)
● When installing or removing a tyre chain, take care
that hands and other parts of your body are not
injured by the sharp edges of the vehicle body.
● Install the chains only on the front tyres and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened.
NOTE
● The laws and regulations concerning the use of tyre chains
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regulations in driving area.
In most countries, it is prohibited by the law to use tyre
chains on roads without snow.
Clutch pedal free play*
E01002200222
Press down the clutch pedal with your fingers until initial
resistance is felt.
This distance should be within the specified range.
A- Free play: 4 to 13 mm
If the clutch pedal free play is not within the standard range, we
recommend you to have it checked.
8
8-23
Maintenance
Brake pedal free play
Parking brake lever stroke
E01002300281
E01005800388
Stop the engine, depress the brake pedal several times, and
press down the pedal with your fingers until initial resistance is
felt. This distance should be within the specified range.
Pull the parking brake lever up to check the number of “clicks”
that the ratchet makes. One click represents a lever movement
of one notch. The lever should move the specified number of
notches for normal brake application.
A- Free play: 3 to 8 mm
If the brake pedal free play is not within the standard range, we
recommend you to have it checked.
A- Parking brake lever stroke: 5 to 7 notches
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with a force of
200 N)
If the parking brake lever stroke is out of the standard range,
we recommend you to have it checked.
8
!
WARNING
● Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking
brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when unattended.
8-24
Maintenance
Wiper blades
Wiper blade rubber replacement
E01002600473
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear window, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades
are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
NOTE
● Under icy conditions, do not have high impact on the
wiper blade by slamming it on the glass. In extremely low
temperatures, the plastic wiper blade is vulnerable to such
shock and may be damaged because of its less plasticity.
Windscreen wiper blade (driver’s side)
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from
the hook (B). Then, pull the wiper blade further to remove
it.
NOTE
● Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windscreen; it
could damage the glass.
8
8-25
Maintenance
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting with the opposite end of the blade from the stopper. Make sure the hook
(B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade.
NOTE
● If retainers are not supplied with the new wiper blade, use
the retainers from the old blade.
8
8-26
5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely
with the stopper (A).
Maintenance
Windscreen wiper blade (passenger’s side)
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disengage it from the
stopper (A) at the end of the wiper arm. Pull the wiper
blade further to remove it.
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook (B) on the wiper
arm.
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the groove (D) in the
wiper blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned as you insert them into the groove.
NOTE
● Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the windscreen; it
could damage the glass.
NOTE
● If a retainer is not supplied with the new wiper blade, use
the retainer from the old blade.
8-27
8
Maintenance
General maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
The rear window wiper uses a wiper arm and wiper blade
designed specially for that wiper. If replacement becomes necessary, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist.
E01002700113
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leakage
Look under the body of your vehicle to check for fuel, engine
coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.
!
WARNING
● If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
do not operate the vehicle; we recommend you to
call for assistance.
Exterior and interior lamp operation
Operate the combination lamp switch to check that all lamps
are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause is a blown
fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the fuses first. If there is no
blown fuses, check the lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and replacement of
the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to “Fuses” on page 8-30 and
“Replacement of lamp bulbs” on page 8-40.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend you to have
your vehicle checked and repaired.
8
8-28
Maintenance
Meter, gauge and indicator/warning lamps
operation
For cold and snow weather
E01002800172
Run the engine to check the operation of all meters, gauges,
and indicator/warning lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to have your
vehicle inspected.
Ventilation slots
Hinges and latches lubrication
Weatherstripping
Check all latches and hinges, and lubricate if necessary by first
cleaning and then applying multipurpose grease.
The ventilation slots in front of the windscreen should be
brushed clear after a heavy snowfall so that the operation of the
heating and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease or spray.
Additional equipment
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in
the vehicle during the winter so that you can clear away snow
if you get stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off
the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and rear
window are also useful.
8
8-29
Maintenance
Fuse links
Fuses
E01002900030
The fuse links will melt to prevent a fire if a large current
attempts to flow through certain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fuse link, we recommend you to have your
vehicle inspected.
E01003001963
Fuse block location
To prevent damage to the electrical system due to shortcircuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is provided
with a fuse.
There is fuse block in the passenger compartment.
LHD
8
8-30
Maintenance
RHD
Fuse load capacity
The fuse capacities and the names of the electrical systems protected by the fuses are shown on the back of the cover in a
LHD vehicle and on the behind the cover at the back of the
glove box in a RHD vehicle.
NOTE
● The vehicle is not equipped with spare fuses. Please purchase replacement fuses as necessary.
Passenger compartment fuse location table
NOTE
● When replacing a fuse, be sure to use a fuse of the same
capacity.
The location of the fuse block in the passenger compartment
depends whether the vehicle is LHD or RHD. In a LHD vehicle, it is located behind the cover in front of the driver’s seat. In
a RHD vehicle, it is located at the back of the glove box (as
shown in the illustration).
8
8-31
Maintenance
Passenger compartment fuse location (LHD)
8
8-32
Passenger compartment fuse location (RHD)
Maintenance
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
1
Ignition switch
40 A
20
2
Electric window system
40 A
21
—
—
—
22
—
—
—
3
Radiator fan
40 A
4
Automated manual transmission
40 A
5
Demister
30 A
6
Heated seat
30 A
7
—
—
—
Headlamp high beam (right)
Capacity
10 A
23
Outside rear-view mirrors
7.5 A
24
Rear fog lamp
7.5 A
25
Accessory socket
15 A
26
Rear window wiper
15 A
27
—
—
—
28
—
—
—
29
—
—
—
30
—
—
—
8
Heater
40 A
9
Radio
10 A
10
Room lamp
10 A
11
Heated door mirror
7.5 A
12
Electronic control module
7.5 A
32
13
Windscreen wiper
20 A
33
Door locks
15 A
14
Tail lamp (right)
7.5 A
34
Front fog lamps
15 A
15
Tail lamp (left)
7.5 A
35
Headlamp low beam (left)
10 A
16
Engine
20 A
36
Headlamp low beam (right)
10 A
17
Fuel pump
15 A
37
Reversing lamp
7.5 A
18
Horn
10 A
38
Engine control
7.5 A
19
Headlamp high beam (left)
10 A
39
Ignition coil
10 A
31
Hazard warning flasher
—
—
10 A
—
8-33
8
Maintenance
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
Identification of fuse
40
Gauge
7.5 A
Capacity
Colour
41
Relay
7.5 A
7.5 A
Brown
Stop lamps
15 A
10 A
Red
Air conditioning
7.5 A
15 A
Blue
—
20 A
Yellow
30 A
Green
40 A
Orange (fuse type) / Green (fusible link type)
42
STOP
43
44
—
—
● Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
● The table above shows the main equipment corresponding
to each fuse.
8
8-34
Maintenance
Fuse replacement
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical circuit concerned and place the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position.
RHD
LHD
2. Remove the fuse puller from the cover. (Refer to “To
remove the cover” on page 8-37, 8-38.)
8
8-35
Maintenance
3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, check the fuse
pertaining to the problem.
A- Fuse is OK
B- Blown fuse
NOTE
● If any system does not function but the fuse corresponding
to that system is normal, there may be a fault in the system
elsewhere. We recommend you to have your vehicle
checked.
8
8-36
4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by using the fuse
puller and insert the fuse at the same place in the fuse
block.
!
CAUTION
● If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a short
time, we recommend you to have the electrical system checked to find the cause and rectify it.
● Never use a fuse with a capacity larger than that
specified or any substitute, such as wire, foil, etc.;
doing so will cause the circuit wiring to heat up and
could cause a fire.
Maintenance
To remove the cover (LHD vehicles)
2. Remove the fuse puller (C) from the cover (B).
E01006800066
1. Turn the clips (A) anticlockwise, then remove the cover
(B).
8
8-37
Maintenance
To remove the cover (RHD vehicles)
3. Remove the fuse puller (C) from the cover (B).
E01006800079
1. Open the glove box.
2. Press the tab (A) and remove the cover (B).
8
8-38
Maintenance
To replace the cover (LHD vehicles)
2. Turn the clips (B) clockwise to retain the cover.
E01006900096
1. Align the cover hooks (A) with the holes in the vehicle
panel, then press the cover into place.
8
8-39
Maintenance
Replacement of lamp bulbs
To replace the cover (RHD vehicles)
E01006900100
Align the tabs (A) on the cover with the holes, then press the
cover into place.
E01003100433
Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do not touch
the glass part of the new bulb with your bare fingers; the skin
oil left on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets hot and
the vapour will condense on the reflector and dim the surface.
!
CAUTION
● Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being
turned off.
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently
before touching it. You could otherwise be burnt.
NOTE
● If you are unsure of how to carry out the work as required,
we recommend you to consult a specialist.
● Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body when removing
a lamp and lens.
● When it rains or the vehicle has been washed, the inside of
the lens becomes foggy sometimes. This is the same phenomenon as when window glass mists up on a humid day,
and does not indicate a functional problem. When the
lamp is switched on, the heat will remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you
have the lamp checked.
8
8-40
Maintenance
Bulb capacity
E01003200043
Rear (3-door models)
When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the same wattage
and colour.
Outside
E01003302048
Front
12345-
Headlamps, high/low beam: 60/55 W (H4)
Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (P21W)
Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)
Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11)
Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W)
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
8
8-41
Maintenance
Rear (5-door models)
Inside
E01003401332
3-door models
8
6- High-mounted stop lamps: 5 W (W5W)
7- Stop and tail lamps (3-door models): 21/5 W (P21/5W)
Stop lamps (5-door models): 16 W (W16W)
8- Rear turn-signal lamps (3-door models): 21 W (P21W)
Rear turn-signal lamps (5-door models): 21 W (PY21W)
9- Rear fog lamp (3-door models, driver’s side): 21 W (P21W)
Reversing lamp (3-door models, passenger’s side): 21 W
(P21W)
Rear fog lamp (5-door models, driver’s side): 21 W (P21W)
Reversing lamp (5-door models, passenger’s side): 21 W
(P21W)
10- Licence plate lamp: 5 W (W5W)
11- Tail lamps (5-door models): 5 W (R5W)
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
8-42
Maintenance
5-door models
Headlamps
E01003501261
1. Turn the cover (A) anticlockwise to remove it.
Front
1- Room lamps & map lamps: 5 W
2- Luggage compartment lamp: 10 W
8
8-43
Maintenance
2. Disconnect the connector (B).
8
8-44
3. Unhook the spring (C) which secures the bulb, and then
remove the headlamp bulb.
Maintenance
!
CAUTION
● Handle halogen lamp bulb with care. The gas inside
halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb
can cause it to shatter.
● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand,
dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with
alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying it
thoroughly.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When installing the bulb, align the upper part as illustrated then press the bulb into place.
Upper
8
8-45
Maintenance
Position lamps
Front turn-signal lamps
E01003700732
E01003800687
1. Disconnect the headlamp connector. (Refer to “Headlamps” on page 8-43.)
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (A) together by
pulling out, and then remove the bulb by pulling out.
1. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to remove it. And
remove the bulb from the socket by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in.
Front
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-46
Maintenance
Side turn-signal lamps
E01003900369
1. Remove the lamp housing by levering it towards the front
of the vehicle.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning
it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling out.
Front
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-47
Maintenance
Front fog lamps*
E01004001276
1. Remove the bezel (A).
8
8-48
2. Remove the lamp mounting screws (B) and pull the entire
lamp bracket out.
Maintenance
3. Push the connector (C) to disconnect and remove the fog
lamp.
4. Remove the entire socket and bulb assembly (D) by turning it anticlockwise.
8
8-49
Maintenance
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When mounting the lamp unit, align the holes in the lamp
unit with the pins (E) on the vehicle body.
8
8-50
!
CAUTION
● Handle halogen lamp bulb with care. The gas inside
halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb
can cause it to shatter.
● Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a bare hand,
dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the fog lamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be cleaned with
alcohol, paint thinner, etc., and refit it after drying
thoroughly.
Maintenance
Rear combination lamps
2. Pull out the connector (B) while pressing the tab (C).
E01004201050
3-door models
1. Remove the screws (A) (2 locations), and then remove the
lamp unit.
8
8-51
Maintenance
3. Remove the screws (D) (3 locations), and then remove the
bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in.
E- Rear turn-signal lamp
F- Stop lamp
8
8-52
Maintenance
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins (G) on the
lamp unit with the holes in the body.
5-door models
1. Remove the screws (A) (2 locations), and then remove the
lamp unit.
8
8-53
Maintenance
2. Push the tab (B) inward with a straight blade (or minus)
screwdriver, and undo the lock in the direction of the
arrow (C), thereby freeing the rear combination lamp unit
from the connector.
8
8-54
3. Undo the clips (D) (6 locations) one by one, starting at the
top and finishing at the bottom. (Pull each clip in the
direction of the arrow to undo it.) Then, remove the bulb
holder.
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by turning it anticlockwise while pressing in (except for stop lamp) or by pulling out (stop lamp).
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins (I) on the
lamp unit with the hole and the clip in the body.
EFGH-
Stop lamp
Rear turn-signal lamp
Tail lamp
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)
Reversing lamp (passenger’s side)
8
8-55
Maintenance
Reversing lamp (passenger’s side)/Rear fog lamp
(driver’s side)
E01004400228
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly (C) together by
turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by
turning it anticlockwise while pressing in.
3-door models
1. Press the tab (A) and remove the cover (B).
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-56
Maintenance
High-mounted stop lamps
E01004500519
2. Remove the screws (C) (2 locations) and remove the bulb
holder, then pull out the bulb.
3-door models
1. Open the tailgate and remove the clips (A) (2 locations).
To remove each clip, press part (B) of the clip then pry
around the clip to get the clip out.
8
8-57
Maintenance
To reinstall
Reverse the above removal procedure. When refitting each of
the clips of the lid, push the clip into the lid with the pin
pressed inward (as illustrated). Then, push in the pin to lock the
clip in place.
8
8-58
5-door models
1. Open the tailgate and remove the covers (A) (2 locations).
Maintenance
2. Push the hooks (B) (2 locations) into the holes and remove
the high-mounted stop lamp. (Close the tailgate to cause
the lamp assembly to come out.)
3. Gently close the tailgate, remove the lamp assembly, and
remove the connector (C), then remove the lamp body.
8
8-59
Maintenance
4. Undo the clips (D) and remove the bulb holder, then pull
out the bulb.
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-60
Licence plate lamp
E01004600800
1. Remove the lamp assembly by levering it out with a
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver.
Maintenance
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning
it anticlockwise, and then remove the bulb by pulling out.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
NOTE
● When installing the lamp, insert tab (A) first, then align
and insert tab (B).
8
8-61
Maintenance
Room lamps & map lamps
Luggage compartment lamp
E01004700478
E01005300370
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
notch of the lens and pry gently to remove the lens.
2. Turn the lamp bulb anticlockwise to remove it from the
lamp bulb holder.
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
notch of the lens and pry gently to remove the lens.
2. Remove the bulb from the lamp bulb holder.
NOTE
● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in
order to avoid scratching the lens.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-62
3-door models
Maintenance
5-door models
NOTE
● Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screwdriver in
order to avoid scratching the lens.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
8
8-63
Specifications
Vehicle labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Vehicle performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Transmission specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Other specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Fuel consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9Refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-
2
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
9
Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle information code plate
E01100102251
Vehicle identification number: (VIN)
The vehicle identification number: (VIN) is stamped as shown
in the illustration.
9
9-2
The vehicle information code plate is riveted as shown in the
illustration.
3-door models
Specifications
5-door models
The plate shows model code, engine model, transmission
model and body colour code, etc.
Please use this number when ordering replacement parts.
1- Model code
2- Engine model code,
Exterior code
3- Transmission model code
4- Approval number
5- Chassis number
6- Maximum gross vehicle weight
7- Body colour code,
Interior code,
Option code
8- Gross combination weight
9- Maximum axle weight (Front)
10- Maximum axle weight (Rear)
9
9-3
Specifications
Vehicle identification number plate
(RHD vehicles only)
The vehicle identification number is stamped on the plate riveted to the left front corner of the instrument panel pad. It is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windscreen.
9
9-4
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine cylinder block as
shown in the illustration.
1100 models
Specifications
1300 models, 1500 models (Except for vehicles with
turbocharger)
1500 models (Vehicles with turbocharger)
*: Front of the vehicle
9
9-5
Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
E01100201734
3-door models
1
Front track
1,460 mm
2
Overall width
1,695 mm
3
Front overhang
4
Wheel base
5
Rear overhang
535 mm
6
Overall length
3,880 mm
7
Ground clearance (unladen)
8
Overall height (unladen)
1,520 mm
9
Rear track
1,445 mm
9
9-6
845 mm
2,500 mm
154 mm
Specifications
5-door models
1
Front track
1,460 mm
2
Overall width
1,695 mm
3
Front overhang
4
Wheel base
5
Rear overhang
595 mm
6
Overall length
3,940 mm
7
Ground clearance (unladen)
8
Overall height (unladen)
1,550 mm
9
Rear track
1,445 mm
845 mm
2,500 mm
154 mm
9
9-7
Specifications
Vehicle performance
E01100301416
1500 models
Item
Maximum speed
Minimum turning Body
radius
Wheel
9
9-8
1100 models
1300 models
Except for vehicles with
turbocharger
Vehicles with turbocharger
165 km/h (100 mph)
180 km/h (110 mph)
190 km/h (120 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
5.4 m
5.1 m
Specifications
Vehicle weight
E01100403277
3-door models
1100 models
Manual transmission
1500 models
Except for
Vehicles
vehicles
with
with
turbocharger
turbocharger
Except for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Except for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Automated
manual
transmission
Without
optional parts
935 kg
940 kg
940 kg
945 kg
945 kg
960 kg
1,060 kg
With full
optional parts
998 kg
1,003 kg
1,003 kg
1,008 kg
1,008 kg
1,006 kg
1,086 kg
1,420 kg,
1,480 kg*
1,425 kg,
1,485 kg*
1,430 kg,
1,490 kg*
1,435 kg,
1,495 kg*
1,435 kg,
1,495 kg*
1,440 kg,
1,500 kg*
1,520 kg,
1,580 kg*
735 kg
740 kg
745 kg
750 kg
745 kg
750 kg
820 kg
Item
Kerb weight
1300 models
Maximum gross vehicle
weight
Maximum axle Front
weight
Rear
720 kg, 785 kg*
With brake
Maximum
towable weight Without
brake
750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight
50 kg
Maximum roof load
50 kg
Seating capacity
500 kg
5 persons
*: In case of trailer towing
NOTE
9
● Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
9-9
Specifications
5-door models
1100 models
Manual transmission
Clear Tec
Except for
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Without
optional parts
965 kg
970 kg
970 kg
975 kg
975 kg
990 kg
1,090 kg
With full
optional parts
1,028 kg
1,033 kg
1,033 kg
1,038 kg
1,038 kg
1,036 kg
1,118 kg
1,450 kg,
1,510 kg*
1,455 kg,
1,515 kg*
1,460 kg,
1,520 kg*
1,465 kg,
1,525 kg*
1,465 kg,
1,525 kg*
1,470 kg,
1,530 kg*
1,550 kg,
1,610 kg*
735 kg
740 kg
745 kg
750 kg
745 kg
750 kg
830 kg
Maximum axle Front
weight
Rear
With brake
Maximum
towable weight Without
brake
745 kg, 810 kg*
750 kg
1,000 kg
500 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight
50 kg
Maximum roof load
50 kg
Seating capacity
*: In case of trailer towing
● Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
9
9-10
Except for
Vehicles
vehicles
with
with
turbocharger
turbocharger
Except for
Clear Tec
Maximum gross vehicle
weight
NOTE
1500 models
Automated
manual
transmission
Item
Kerb weight
1300 models
5 persons
Specifications
Engine specifications
E01100601914
1500 models
Item
Engine type
1100 models
1300 models
Except for vehicles with
turbocharger
Vehicles with
turbocharger
Three-cylinder, in line,
water cooled four-cycle,
double overhead camshaft
Four-cylinder, in line,
water cooled four-cycle,
double overhead camshaft
Four-cylinder, in line,
water cooled four-cycle,
double overhead camshaft
Four-cylinder, in line,
water cooled four-cycle,
double overhead camshaft with intercooler and
turbocharger
134910
1,124 cc
75.0 mm
84.8 mm
10.5, 11.0*
135930
1,332 cc
75.0 mm
75.4 mm
10.5, 11.0*
135950
1,499 cc
75.0 mm
84.8 mm
10.5
4G15
1,468 cc
75.5 mm
82.0 mm
9.0
Engine model
Total displacement
Bore
Stroke
Compression ratio
Valve clearance
Intake
0.18 - 0.26 mm (cold)
Automatically
Exhaust
0.26 - 0.34 mm (cold)
Automatically
Firing order
1-3-2
1-3-4-2
Maximum output (EEC
net)
55 kW/
6,000 r/min
70 kW/
6,000 r/min
80 kW/
6,000 r/min
110 kW/
6,000 r/min
Maximum torque (EEC
net)
100 N·m/
4,000 r/min
125 N·m/
4,000 r/min
145 N·m/
4,000 r/min
210 N·m/
3,500 r/min
*: For Clear Tec models only
9
9-11
Specifications
Transmission specifications
E01100701276
1100 models
Clear Tec
Clear Tec
Automated
manual
transmission
3.308
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
—
3.231
3.308
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
—
3.231
3.308
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
—
3.231
3.308
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
—
3.231
3.071
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
0.643
3.231
3.308
1.913
1.258
0.943
0.763
—
3.231
3.538
1.913
1.344
1.027
0.833
—
3.357
4.353
4.158
4.158
3.842
4.529
4.158
3.737
Except for
Clear Tec
1st gear ratio
2nd gear ratio
3rd gear ratio
4th gear ratio
5th gear ratio
6th gear ratio
Reverse gear ratio
Final gear ratio
9-12
Manual transmission
1500 models
Except for
Clear Tec
Item
9
1300 models
Except for
Vehicles with
vehicles with
turbocharger
turbocharger
Specifications
Electrical system
E01100801668
1100 models
Item
Except for
Clear Tec
1300 models
Except for
Clear Tec &
Clear Tec
FFV
Clear Tec
Voltage
Clear Tec
FFV
Except for
Vehicles with
vehicles with
turbocharger
turbocharger
42 Ah (542),
61 Ah (561)*
12 V
Battery capacity (DIN
type)
Alternator capacity
Spark
plug type
Clear Tec
1500 models
BOSCH
NGK
42 Ah (542),
61 Ah (561)*
61 Ah (561)
85 A
FR7SE,
FR7NPP33
42 Ah (542),
61 Ah (561)*
61 Ah (561)
42 Ah (542),
61 Ah (561)*
95 A
85 A
95 A
85 A
85 A
80 A
FR7SI30
FR7SE,
FR7NPP33
—
FR7SE,
FR7NPP33
—
ILZFR6C11K
—
ILZFR6C-K
—
FR7SI30
*: Optional equipment
NOTE
● For Clear Tec models, contact an authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer when replacing the battery.
9
9-13
Specifications
Tyres and wheels
E01100902031
Item
Tyre
Wheel
1100 models, 1300 models
175/65R14 82T
Size
14x5 1/2J
Offset
185/55R15 82H*
195/50R15 82H
15x6J
205/45R16 83H
16x6 1/2J
46 mm
*: For Clear Tec models only
Item
Tyre
Wheel
9
9-14
1500 models
Except for vehicles with turbocharger
195/50R15 82H
Size
Offset
Vehicles with turbocharger
205/45R16 83H
15x6J
205/45R16 83V
16x6 1/2J
46 mm
Specifications
Other specifications
E01101000950
Item
Fuel system
Electric controlled injection
Fuel pump
Electric motor type
Dry single disc clutch, hydraulic action
Steering system
Service brakes
1500 models
Fuel control
Clutch
Suspension
1100 models, 1300 models
Rack and pinion type, electric power assisted
Front
Independent type, MacPherson strut, coil spring
Rear
Torsion beam rigid type
Type
Hydraulic, dual diagonal circuit with power assistance and anti-lock brake system with electronic brake force distribution function
Front
Ventilated disc brakes
Rear
Parking brakes
Drum brakes, Disc brakes*
Disc brakes
Parking brake acts mechanically on rear wheels
*: Optional equipment
9
9-15
Specifications
Fuel consumption
E01101100427
Except for Clear Tec & Clear Tec FFV
Combined
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
CO2
(g/km)
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
CO2
(g/km)
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
130
5.5
165
7.0
110
4.6
135
5.7
172
7.3
115
4.8
With 175/65R14 tyres
138
5.8
175
7.4
115
4.8
With 195/50R15 or
205/45R16 tyres
143
6.0
182
7.7
119
5.0
With 175/65R14 tyres
133
5.6
172
7.3
110
4.6
With 195/50R15 or
205/45R16 tyres
138
5.8
178
7.5
119
5.0
145
6.1
185
7.8
121
5.1
148
6.2
190
8.0
122
5.1
161
6.8
203
8.6
136
5.7
With 175/65R14 tyres
1100
models With 195/50R15 or 205/45R16 tyres
1300
models
Automated manual
transmission
3-door models
Except for vehicles
1500
with turbocharger
5-door models
models
Vehicles with turbocharger
9
9-16
Extra-urban
conditions
CO2
(g/km)
Item
Manual transmission
Urban conditions
Specifications
Clear Tec & Clear Tec FFV
Combined
Item
Urban conditions
Extra-urban conditions
CO2
(g/km)
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
CO2
(g/km)
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
CO2
(g/km)
Fuel
consumption
(L/100 km
(62 miles))
1100
Clear Tec
models
With 175/65R14 or
185/55R15 tyres
115
4.9
138
5.9
102
4.3
Clear Tec
With 175/65R14 or
185/55R15 tyres
119
5.0
148
6.3
103
4.3
With 175/65R14 tyres
138
5.8
175
7.4
115
4.8
With 195/50R15 or
205/45R16 tyres
143
6.0
182
7.7
119
5.0
1300
models
Clear Tec FFV
NOTE
● The values shown above apply to a vehicle on which optional equipment has not been fitted.
● The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In
addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions,
as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.
● For Clear Tec FFV models, the values shown for the fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are when unleaded petrol 95 RON
or higher is used for the fuel.
9
9-17
Specifications
Refill capacities
E01101302494
(LHD)
(RHD)
*1
1100 models
1100 models
: Except for vehicles with turbocharger
9
9-18
1300 models, 1500 models*1
1300 models, 1500 models*1
*2
: Vehicles with turbocharger
1500 models*2
1500 models*2
Specifications
No.
1
Item
Washer fluid
Engine oil
4
—
3.0 litres
0.2 litre
1300 models, Oil pan
1500 models*1 Oil filter
4.0 litres
1500
models*2
0.2 litre
0.3 litre
Oil cooler
0.1 litre
As required
Clutch fluid
1100 models
1300 models, 1500
4.2 litres
models*1
1500 models*2
4.6 litres
High-quality ethylene glycol based coolant
6.0 litres
1.75 litres
DiaQueen NEW MULTI GEAR OIL API classification GL-3, SAE 75W-80 or DiaQueen WIDE
GEAR OIL G-1 or Castrol/Burmah gear oil
BOT328 (or exact equivalents)
Vehicles with turbocharger
1.75 litres
DiaQueen WIDE GEAR OIL G-1 or Castrol/Burmah gear oil BOT328 (or exact equivalents)
Automated manual transmission oil
1.75 litres
DiaQueen WIDE GEAR OIL G-1 or Castrol/Burmah gear oil BOT328 (or exact equivalents)
Refrigerant (air conditioning)
410 - 450 g
HFC-134a
5
*1
Brake fluid DOT 4 +
Except for vehicles with
turbocharger
Manual transmission oil
6
Refer to page 8-6
3.3 litres
Oil filter
Brake fluid
Engine coolant
[includes 0.6 litre in the reserve
tank]
5.16 litres
Oil filter
Oil pan
3
Lubricants
Oil pan
1100 models
2
Quantity
: Except for vehicles with turbocharger
*2
9
: Vehicles with turbocharger
9-19
Alphabetical index
A
Accessory socket 5-62
Accessory (Installation) 6
Active stability control system (ASC) 4-47
Indicator lamp 4-49
Additional equipment 8-29
Air bag 2-36
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning 5-13
Important operation tips for the air conditioning 5-21
Air purifier 5-22
Airbag
Front passenger?s airbag off indicator lamp 2-42
Front passenger?s airbag ON-OFF switch 2-42
Antenna 5-56
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-41
Warning lamp 4-43
Audio
Error codes 5-51
Handling of compact discs 5-53
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player 5-23
Auto Stop & Go (AS&G) system 4-19
Automated manual transmission 4-28
Oil 9-18
Automatic air conditioning 5-13
B
Battery 8-14
Charge warning lamp 3-29
Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-2
Specification 9-13
Bonnet 8-4
Brake
Anti-lock brake 4-41
Brake assist system 4-40
Braking 4-38
Fluid 8-13, 9-18
Parking brake 4-6
Parking brake lever stroke 8-24
Pedal free play 8-24
Power brakes 4-38
Warning lamp 3-26
Bulb capacity 8-41
C
Capacities 9-18
Cargo loads 4-58
Catalytic converter 8-3
Central door locks 1-11
Changing a fuse 8-35
Charge warning lamp 3-29
Chassis number 9-2
Check engine warning lamp 3-28
Child restraint 2-22
Child-protection rear doors 1-15
Cleaning
Exterior of your vehicle 7-4
1
Alphabetical index
Genuine leather 7-4
Interior of your vehicle 7-3
Plastic, vinyl leather, etc 7-3
Clock 5-56
Clutch
Fluid 8-13
Pedal free play 8-23
Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-31
Coming home light 3-34
Compact spare wheel 6-24
Cool box 5-68
Coolant (engine) 8-10, 9-18
Cruise control 4-50
Cup holder 5-73
D
Dead Lock System 1-12
Demister (rear window) 3-48
Digital clock 5-56
Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-33
Door-ajar warning lamp 3-30
Doors
Central door locks 1-11
Child-protection 1-15
Dead Lock System 1-12
Lock and unlock 1-9
Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-3
2
E
Economical driving 4-2
Electric power steering system 4-45
Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors 4-12
Electric window control 1-19
Electrical system 9-13
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) 1-3
Emergency starting 6-2
Emergency stop signal system 4-39
Engine
Coolant 8-10, 9-18
High coolant temperature warning lamp 3-30
Number 9-4
Oil 8-6
Oil and oil filter 9-18
Overheating 6-6
Specifications 9-11
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal
information 8
Error codes 5-51
Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-28
F
Fluid
Brake fluid 8-13, 9-18
Clutch fluid 8-13, 9-18
Engine coolant 8-10, 9-18
Washer fluid 8-12, 9-18
Alphabetical index
Fluid capacities and lubricants 9-18
For cold and snow weather 8-29
Front fog lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Indicator lamp 3-25
Replacement 8-48
Switch 3-39
Front passenger?s airbag ON-OFF switch 2-42
Front seat 2-5
Front turn-signal lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-46
Frozen road warning 3-12
Fuel
Filling the fuel tank 3
Fuel selection 2
Fuel tank filler door release lever 4
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 7
Tank capacity 4
Fuel consumption 9-16
Fuse links 8-30
Fuse load capacity 8-31
Fuse replacement 8-35
Fuses 8-30
G
Gauges 3-2, 3-24
General maintenance 8-28
Genuine parts 8
Glove box 5-67
H
Handling of compact discs 5-53
Hazard warning flasher switch 3-38
Hazard warning indicator lamps 3-25
Head restraints 2-8
Headlamp levelling switch 3-35
Headlamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Headlamp flasher 3-34
Replacement 8-43
Switch 3-31
Heated mirror 4-13
Heated seats 2-7
Heater 5-7
High coolant temperature warning lamp 3-30
High-beam indicator lamp 3-25
High-mounted stop lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-57
Hinges and latches lubrication 8-29
Horn switch 3-49
How to drive a vehicle with automated manual
transmission 4-33
I
If the vehicle breaks down 6-2
Ignition switch 4-14
3
Alphabetical index
Indicator and warning lamps 3-24
Indicator lamps 3-25
Inside rear-view mirror 4-10
Installation of accessories 6
Instruments 3-2
Interior lamps 5-63
J
Jack 6-20
Storage 6-9
Jacking up the vehicle 6-21
Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-2
K
Keyless entry system 1-5
Keys 1-2
L
Labeling 9-2
Lamp monitor buzzer 3-33
Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas) 8-28
Licence plate lamp
Replacement 8-60
Licence plate lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Lubricants 9-18
Luggage compartment lamp 5-64
Bulb capacity 8-42
Replacement 8-62
4
Luggage floor boxes 5-71
Luggage floor cargo 5-69
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player 5-23
M
Manual transmission 4-25
Oil 9-18
Map lamps 5-64
Mirror
Inside rear-view mirror 4-10
Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems 7
Multi-information display 3-5
O
Oil
Automated manual transmission oil 9-18
Engine oil 8-6
Manual transmission oil 9-18
Oil pressure warning lamp 3-29
Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-41
Other specifications 9-15
Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10
Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors 4-12
Manual remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors 4-11
Overheating 6-6
P
Parking 4-8
Alphabetical index
Parking brake 4-6
Parking brake lever stroke 8-24
Position lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-46
Power brakes 4-38
Power steering
System 4-45
Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers 3-48
Pregnant women restraint 2-20
Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-27
R
Radio
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player 5-23
Rain sensor 3-43
Rear combination lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-51
Rear fog lamp
Bulb capacity 8-41
Indication lamp 3-25
Replacement 8-51, 8-56
Switch 3-40
Rear shelf panel 5-74
Rear turn-signal lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-51
Rear window demister switch 3-48
Rear-view mirror
Inside 4-10
Outside 4-10
Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-40
Reversing lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-51, 8-56
Room lamp 5-63
Room lamps & map lamps
Bulb capacity 8-42
Replacement 8-62
Running-in recommendations 4-5
S
Safe driving techniques 4-3
Seat
Adjustment 2-4
Arrangement 2-3
Front seat 2-5
Head restraints 2-8
Heated seats 2-7
Seat belt 2-15
Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-19
Child restraint 2-22
Inspection 2-35
Pregnant women restraint 2-20
Pre-tensioner 2-20
Seat belt reminder/warning lamp 2-18
Service precaution 8-2
5
Alphabetical index
Side turn-signal lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-47
Snow tyres 8-21
Spare wheel 6-24
Spark plug 9-13
Specifications 9-2
Speedometer 3-3
Starting 4-16
Steering
Power steering system 4-45
Steering wheel height adjustment 4-9
Steering wheel lock 4-15
Stop lamps
Bulb capacity 8-41
Replacement 8-51
Storage spaces 5-65
Sun visors 5-61
Supplemental restraint system 2-36
Curtain air bag system 2-51
How the supplemental restraint system works 2-40
Servicing 2-58
Side air bag system 2-50
Warning lamp 2-57
T
Tachometer 3-4
Tail lamp
Bulb capacity 8-41
6
Replacement 8-51
Tailgate 1-16
Tank capacity 4
Tools 6-10
Storage 6-9
Towing 6-34
Traction control system (TCL) 4-47
Indicator lamp 4-49
Trailer towing 4-58
Transmission
Automated manual transmission 4-28
Manual transmission 4-25
Specifications 9-12
Turn-signal indicator lamps 3-25
Turn-signal lever 3-37
Tyre repair kit 6-10
Tyres 8-18
How to change a tyre 6-27
Inflation pressures 8-18
Rotation 8-20
Size (tyre and wheel) 9-14
Snow tyres 8-21
Tyre chains 8-21
Wheel condition 8-19
U
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal information 8
Alphabetical index
V
Vanity mirror 5-61
Vehicle care precautions 7-2
Vehicle information code plate 9-2
Vehicle labeling 9-2
Vehicle performance 9-8
Vehicle weight 9-9
Ventilators 5-2
W
Warning lamps 3-26
Washer
Fluid 8-12, 9-18
Switch 3-41, 3-46, 3-47
Washing 7-4
Waxing 7-6
Weatherstripping 8-29
Weight 9-9
Wheel
Covers 6-33
Specification 9-14
Wiper
Rain sensor 3-43
Rear window 3-47
Switch 3-41
Wiper blades 8-25
7
8